Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
SERVICE MANUAL
CONTENTS
GENERAL
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1 2. SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 4. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6 5. HANDLING OF SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-7 6. SYSTEM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8 7. PARTS IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-9 8. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11 8-1. Basic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-11 8-2. System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-13 8-3. Supplementary Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14 8-4. Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-15 8-5. Users Choice Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16 8-6. Tech. Rep. Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-17
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1 2. COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2 3. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4 4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5 5. WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION . . . . . . . M-8 5-1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-2. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9 6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-2. AIDC Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-13 7. PC DRUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-1. PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-23 7-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24
CONTENTS
8. DRUM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-25 8-1. PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-25 8-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-26 8-3. Ozone Filter (PC Drum Charge Corona) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-27 9. OPTICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-2. Exposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-29 9-3. Exposure Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-30 9-4. Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-34 9-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism . M-35 9-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-35 9-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-39 9-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control . . . M-44 10. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-48 10-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-48 10-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) . . . . . . M-49 10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-49 10-2-2. Original Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-50 10-2-3. Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-51 10-3. Original Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-1. Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-53 10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-54 11. IMAGE ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-2. Leading Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-3. Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-57 11-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-59 11-2-5. Center Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-59 11-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-60 11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-61 12. DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-62 12-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-62 12-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-63 12-3. Developer Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-64 12-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-65
ii
CONTENTS
12-5. Developing Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-67 12-6. ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-68 12-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . . M-71 12-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control . . M-72 12-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . M-75 12-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-77 13. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-78 13-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-78 13-2. Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-79 13-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-80 13-3-1. Normal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-80 13-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-81 13-3-3. Double Feed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-82 13-4. Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer . . . . M-84 13-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85 13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-86 13-6. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-87 13-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-88 13-8. Manual Bypass Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-90 13-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . M-91 13-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control . . . . . . . . . . . M-92 13-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . M-93 13-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . M-94 14. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-96 14-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-97 14-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-98 15. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-99 15-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-99 15-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-100 15-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-101 15-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-102
iii
CONTENTS
16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS . . . . . . . . M-104 16-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-104 16-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation. . . . . M-105 16-3. Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-106 16-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control . . . . . . . M-107 17. CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-2. Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-109 17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-3. Spent Toner Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-110 17-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism. . . . . . . . . M-110 17-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position . . . . M-111 17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-113 17-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism . . . M-113 17-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-114 17-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control . . . . . . . M-115 17-5. AIDC Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-116 17-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-117 18. MAIN ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-118 19. PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-120 19-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-121 19-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-122 20. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-123 20-1. Construction and Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-123 20-2. Fusing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-124 20-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-124 20-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-125 20-5. Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-126 20-6. Fusing Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-127
iv
CONTENTS
21. EXIT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-131 21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-132 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-3-2. Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-4. Paper Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-133 21-4-2. Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-134 22. TOTAL COUNTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-1. Total Counter CT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-136 22-3. CT1 Count-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-136 23. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-137 24. MEMORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-141
SAFETY INFORMATION (ALL Area) CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (Denmark only) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Norway only) ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Sweden only) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Finland only) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
GENERAL
1 SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE PHOTOCONDUCTOR COPYING SYSTEM PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM : Desktop (with Stationary Platen) : Organic Photoconductor : Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to Plain Paper : 3-Way Feeding 1st Drawer: Fixed Paper Size Tray (500 sheets of paper)
2nd Drawer: Fixed Paper Size Tray (500 sheets of paper) Multi Bypass Table (50 sheets of paper) EXPOSURE SYSTEM DEVELOPING SYSTEM CHARGING SYSTEM IMAGE TRANSFER SYSTEM PAPER SEPARATING SYSTEM FUSING SYSTEM PAPER DISCHARGING SYSTEM : Mirror Scanning, Slit Exposure : Minolta New Micro-Toning System : Single-Wire DC Negative Corona with Scorotron System : Visible Image Transfer by means of a Single-Wire DC Negative Corona with Corotron System : Single-Wire AC Corona with Corotron System, plus Paper Separator Fingers : Heat Roller : Charge Neutralizing Brush
1st Drawer (Automatic feeding) Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m 2 ) Medium Translucent paper Transparencies Thick paper (91 to 157 g/m 2) Recycled paper
Dimensions
O: Permissible
G-1
: 1 to 99 : 150 sec. or less with room temperature of 20C and rated power voltage : A4C or 8-1/2" 11"C: 6.8 sec. or less
CONTINUOUS COPY SPEED (copies/min.) (Zoom Ratio 1.000) Area Size Metric A3L A4L A4C B4L 14 19 25 16 Inch
Zoom Ratio
100.0%
Area Size
Zoom Ratio
100.0% 14 20 25
L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise
ZOOM RATIOS: Area Mode Fixed Full Size Reduction 100.0% 81.6% 70.7% 50.0% 100.0% 78.5% 73.3% 64.7% 50.0% Enlargement 200.0% 141.4% 115.4% 200.0% 154.5% 129.4% 121.4% Variable LENS EXPOSURE LAMP FUSING TEMPERATURE 50.0% to 200.0% (in 0.1% increments) : Through Lens (F = 6.0, f = 180 mm) : Halogen Frost Tube Lamp : During a copy cycle = 185C In Standby = 185C Metric Inch
G-2
POWER/CURRENT CONSUMPTION (Copier Only): Exposure Lamp (Rating) Fusing Heater Lamp (Rating) 115, 127 V 850 W 120 V 850 W 200 V 850 W 200 V 850 W Max. Power Consumption Max. Current Consumption 11.2 A (115 V) 10.1 A (127 V) 11.2 A 6.7 A 6.1 A
Voltage
In Standby
115, 127 V
1240 W
900 W
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Temperature Humidity Ambient Illumination Levelness DIMENSIONS 10 to 35C with a fluctuation of 10C or less per hour 15 to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 20% RH or less per hour 3,000 lux or less 1 (1.75 mm/100 mm) : Width .... 620 mm Depth .... 685 mm Height ... 602 mm (including Original Glass) : 75 kg (excluding the Exit Tray, starter, toner, and copy paper) : Operators Manual, Setting-up Instructions, Starter, Exit Tray, Users Choice Card1 . " 1. Except Europe"
G-3
2 SPACE REQUIREMENTS
To ensure easy copier operation, supply replacement, and service maintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below.
* Be sure to allow a clearance of 150 (6") mm. or more at the back of the
1136O162AA
1136O163AA
<Unit: mm>
G-4
G-5
G-6
G-7
6 SYSTEM OPTIONS
1 2
1139O0010A
1139O0010A
11
10
1138O525AA
1139O0020A
1139O0020A 1136O061AA
6 4
1139O0030A
5
1139O018AA
1136O059AA
1136O059AA
8
1139O1222A
7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Automatic Document Feeder AF-3 Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-7 Data Controller D-102 Duplex Unit AD-5 Paper Feed Cabinet PF2D Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 (Except USA, CANADA) Paper Feed Cabinet PF-102 20-Bin Sorter S-205 Staple Sorter ST-206 10-Bin Sorter S-104 Staple Sorter ST-101
1139O1212A
G-8
7 PARTS IDENTIFICATION
x Outside of the Copier Left Door Lock Release Lever Left Door Exit Tray Front Door
1st/2nd Drawer
Power Switch
G-9
Original Glass
G-10
9 10
1 4
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
# of Origs.
11 12 13
1136P250DA
2in1
7
Sort
1 2 1 2
2in1
Auto
Hole Punch
2in1
Exposure
2 2 2
2in1
Zoom
Paper
Lighter
Darker
x0.5~x2.0
Reduce Full size Enlarge Auto Select
A
Finishing Orig. Copy
14 15
23 22 21 20 19 18 17
16
1 2 3
A tray in which to put the paper clips used with the documents. See "System Panel" for details. The Supplementary Panel controls are revealed when the System Panel is opened. See "Supplementary Panel" for details. Flip to the left to reveal the Supplementary Panel controls. Lowers the exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode.
4 5 6 7 8 9
System Panel (Door to Supplementary Panel) Exposure Control Key (<, Lighter)
Auto Exposure Mode Key Selects either the Auto or Manual Exposure mode. Exposure Control Key (>, Darker) Display Panel Multi-Copy Keys Raises the exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode. See "Display Panel" for details. [Basic function] * Set the number of copies to be made, access number (of department), and other numeric data. [Users Choice] * Set the auto panel reset time, Energy Saver time, and the maximum number of copies that can be selected. * Set the access number (of the administrator) and User Help code. [Tech. Rep. Mode] * Set the Test Mode operation number, access number (of the administrator), and Tech. Rep. ID. * Set the paper size and other settings.
G-11
Permits the copier to enter or leave the Administrator mode. The key becomes valid only when "Copy Track" of the Administrator function of the Users Choice has been set to "YES." Sets the copier into the Energy Saver mode. Interrupts a current job with a different one. A second press returns the copier to the previous job. * Clears the number of copies selected. * Clears the counter counts. * Ejects a document, that has previously been fed from the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder onto the Original Glass, out onto the Document Exit Tray.
* Initializes the copier. * Ejects a document, that has previously been fed from the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder onto the Original Glass, out onto the Document Exit Tray. * Allows the copiers to feed 1-sided copies from the Duplex Unit out onto the Exit Tray.
15 Stop Key
* Stops a multi-copy cycle. * Stops a Test Mode operation. * Sets the copier into the Tech. Rep. or Adjust mode.
16 Start Key
* Starts a copy cycle. * Starts a Test Mode operation. * Sets the copier into the Adjust mode.
17 Paper Select Key 18 Auto Paper Mode Key 19 Enlargement Key 20 Full Size Key 21 Reduction Key 22 Zoom Up/Down Key 23 Message Display
Selects the paper size. Selects the Auto Paper mode. Selects a fixed enlargement ratio. Selects full size (100%). Selects a fixed reduction ratio. Makes the zoom ratio larger or smaller in 0.1% increments, in the range between 50% and 200%. Serves as the basic source of information showing such information as warning messages and copying mode currently selected for use.
G-12
1 4
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
# of Origs.
2in1
7
Sort
1 2 1 2
2in1
Auto
Hole Punch
2in1
Exposure
2 2 2
2in1
Zoom
Paper
Lighter
Darker
x0.5~x2.0
Reduce Full size Enlarge Auto Select
A
Finishing Orig. Copy
1136P251DA
7
1 Manual Staple Key
* Staples copy sets or stacks already made. * Permits the stapling of copies as they are manually placed in the Top or 1st Bin when there are no copies in any of the Bins.
2 3
Original Count Mode Key Selects the appropriate original count mode to determine whether the odd-page correction is necessary. Original>Copy Type Select Key II Original>Copy Type Select Key I Hole Punch Mode Key Selects the type of 2-in-1 copying job to be performed. Selects the type of copying job making 1- or 2-sided copies from 1- or 2-sided originals. Sets the copier into the Hole Punch mode. (Possible only on A3, 11" 17" lengthwise or A4, 8-1/2" 11" crosswise paper. The mode is not acceptable when the copier is in the Mixed Original Detection mode.) Selects the type of exit processing.
4 5 6
G-13
8-3. Supplementary Panel Flipping the System Panel to the left reveals the Supplementary Panel controls. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Zoom Memory
Auto Size
123
1 4
2 5 8 0
7
Auto
Cover (Front&Back)
Erase 2
Toner
Book
Margin 1
Erase 3
Exposure
Book 2 Margin 2 Erase 4
Zoom
Paper
Lighter
Darker
x0.5~x2.0
A
Drum Dehumidify
Auto
Select
OK
1136P252CA
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14
13
12
11
10
System Panel (Door to Supplementary Panel) Insertion Mode Key Cover Mode Key Meter Count Key Memory Input Key Job Memory Select Key Zoom Memory Select Key Auto Size Mode Key Erase Mode Key
Flip to the left to reveal the Supplementary Panel controls. Sets the copier into the Insertion mode. Sets the copier into the Cover mode. Shows on the Message Display the current counts of different electronic counters of the copier. Stores a copying job program or a zoom ratio in the memory. Recalls a copying job program previously stored in the job memory. Stores a zoom ratio in, or recalls one from, the zoom memory. Selects the Auto Size Mode. Sets the copier into the Erase mode. Validates the selection made by the Select Key. Selects a function from among the options shown on the Message Display. Sets the copier into the File Margin mode. Sets the copier into the Book Copy mode. Removes condensation formed on the surface of the PC Drum. Sets the copier into the Auxiliary Toner Replenishing mode. It does not, however, start the toner replenishing sequence if the toner-to-carrier ratio is above a predetermined level.
10 Enter Key 11 Select Key 12 File Margin Mode Key 13 Book Mode Key 14 Drum Dehumidify Key 15 Auxiliary Toner Replenishing Key
G-14
123
Auto
1136P253CA
1136P253CA
14
1 Monitor Display
13
12
11
10
* Shows the paper source which is currently selected for use. * Shows the location of a closure failure. * Shows the location of a paper misfeed.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Misfeed Indicator
Call-Tech.-Rep. Indicator Indicates that the copier has developed a malfunction. Maintenance Call Indicator Closure Failure Indicator Add Toner Indicator Wait Indicator Multi-Copy Display Indicates that a PM counter or Copy Kit counter has reached a preset value. Indicates that a Door is left open. Indicates that the Toner Bottle is running out of toner. Indicates that the Fusing Unit is warming up or the Lens/Mirror is in motion. Shows the number of copies set to be made.
Plug-In Counter Indicator Indicates that the Plug-In Counter is unplugged from the copier or a magnetic card removed from the Data Controller. Indicates that the Staple Cartridge is running out of staples. Indicates that the Spent Toner counter has reached a preset value.
12 Remove Copies Indicator Indicates that there is a copy or copies left in any of the Sorter Bins. 13 Add Paper Indicator 14 Exposure Information Display Indicates that the currently selected Drawer has run out of paper. Auto Exposure Indicator Exposure Level Indicator : Indicates that the copier is now in the Auto Exposure mode. : Shows the exposure setting level in the Manual Exposure mode.
G-15
8-5. Users Choice Card 8-5-1. Entering the Users Choice 1. Flip the System Panel to the left and place the Users Choice Card shown below on the Supplementary Panel. 2. Hold down the Panel Reset Key more than 3 seconds. 3. This sets the copier into the Users Choice. Now, operate the panel as instructed by the Message Display.
* For details on the Users Choice functions and associated operating
Zoom Memory
Auto Size
123
1 4
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
7
Auto
Cover (Front&Back)
Erase 2
Toner
Book
Margin 1
Erase 3
Exposure
Book 2 Margin 2 Erase 4
Zoom
Paper
Lighter
Darker
x0.5~x2.0
A
Drum Dehumidify
Auto
Select
OK
1136P360DA
Control Panel
G-16
8-6. Tech. Rep. Card 8-6-1. Entering the Tech. Rep. Mode 1. Flip the System Panel to the left and place the Tech. Rep. Card shown below on the Supplementary Panel. 2. Press the Keys " " "0" " " "1", in that order. 3. This sets the copier into the Tech. Rep. mode. Now, operate the panel as instructed by the Message Display.
* For details on the Tech. Rep. mode functions and associated operating
Tech.Rep. Card - 2
Card - 2 Card - 1
Tech. Rep. ID Code
Data Save
Level History
Jam
Paper
Initial Transmission
Data Load
Retry
Port
DT Setting
Port
Panel Indication
Function
Trouble
Maintenance
Memory
Consumables
RD Mode
I/O Check
Enter F O P
Counter
1136P03GCA
1136P04GCA
G-17
MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL
SAFETY INFORMATION (ALL Area) CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (Denmark only) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Norway only) ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Sweden only) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Finland only) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
CONTENTS
GENERAL
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1 2. SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4 3. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 4. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6 5. HANDLING OF SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-7 6. SYSTEM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8 7. PARTS IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-9 8. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11 8-1. Basic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-11 8-2. System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-13 8-3. Supplementary Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-14 8-4. Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-15 8-5. Users Choice Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16 8-6. Tech. Rep. Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-17
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL
1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-1 2. COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-2 3. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-4 4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5 5. WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION . . . . . . . M-8 5-1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-2. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-8 5-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9 6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11 6-2. AIDC Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-13 7. PC DRUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-1. PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-23 7-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-23 7-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24
CONTENTS
8. DRUM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-25 8-1. PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-25 8-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-26 8-3. Ozone Filter (PC Drum Charge Corona) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-27 9. OPTICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-28 9-2. Exposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-29 9-3. Exposure Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-30 9-4. Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-34 9-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism . M-35 9-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-35 9-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-39 9-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control . . . M-44 10. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-48 10-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-48 10-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) . . . . . . M-49 10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-49 10-2-2. Original Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-50 10-2-3. Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-51 10-3. Original Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-1. Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-52 10-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-53 10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-54 11. IMAGE ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-55 11-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-2. Leading Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56 11-2-3. Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-57 11-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-59 11-2-5. Center Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-59 11-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-60 11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-61 12. DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-62 12-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-62 12-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-63 12-3. Developer Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-64 12-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-65
ii
CONTENTS
12-5. Developing Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-67 12-6. ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-68 12-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . . M-71 12-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control . . M-72 12-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . M-75 12-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-77 13. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-78 13-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-78 13-2. Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-79 13-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-80 13-3-1. Normal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-80 13-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-81 13-3-3. Double Feed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-82 13-4. Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-83 13-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer . . . . M-84 13-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85 13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-86 13-6. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-87 13-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-88 13-8. Manual Bypass Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-89 13-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-90 13-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . M-91 13-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control . . . . . . . . . . . M-92 13-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . M-93 13-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . M-94 14. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-95 14-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-96 14-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-97 14-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-98 15. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-99 15-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-99 15-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-100 15-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-101 15-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-102
iii
CONTENTS
16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS . . . . . . . . M-104 16-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-104 16-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation. . . . . M-105 16-3. Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-106 16-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control . . . . . . . M-107 17. CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-108 17-2. Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-109 17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109 17-3. Spent Toner Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-110 17-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism. . . . . . . . . M-110 17-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position . . . . M-111 17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-113 17-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism . . . M-113 17-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-114 17-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control . . . . . . . M-115 17-5. AIDC Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-116 17-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-117 18. MAIN ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-118 18-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-118 19. PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-120 19-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-120 19-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-121 19-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-122 20. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-123 20-1. Construction and Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-123 20-2. Fusing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-124 20-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-124 20-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-125 20-5. Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-126 20-6. Fusing Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-127
iv
CONTENTS
21. EXIT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-131 21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-131 21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-132 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-3-2. Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132 21-4. Paper Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-133 21-4-2. Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-133 21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-134 22. TOTAL COUNTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-1. Total Counter CT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-135 22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-136 22-3. CT1 Count-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-136 23. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-137 24. MEMORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M-141
SAFETY INFORMATION (ALL Area) CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (Denmark only) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Norway only) ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Sweden only) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Finland only) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
1 CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 39 38 37 36 35 34 22 23 24 33 32 25 26 27 18 19 20 21
31
30 29
28
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
3rd Mirror 2nd Mirror 1st Mirror Exposure Lamp LA1 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 PC115 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 PC119 Lens Main Erase Lamp LA3 Cleaning Blade PC Drum Charge Corona PC Drum Dust-Proof Glass 6th Mirror Image Erase Lamp LA2 Sleeve/Magnet Roller 4th Mirror 5th Mirror Synchronizing Roller Transport Roller
20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.
Manual Bypass Feed Roll Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Multi Bypass Table Manual Bypass Separator Roll Upper Vertical Transport Roller 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll Lower Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll Image Transfer Corona Paper Separator Corona Suction Belt Fusing Thermoswitch TS1 Lower Fusing Roller Upper Fusing Roller Fusing Heater Lamp H1 Fusing Paper Separator Finger 1st Paper Exit Roller 2nd Paper Exit Roller Exit/Duplex Switching Guide Oil Roller
M-1
2 COPY PROCESS
2 3 4 10 9 1 5
13 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PC DRUM DRUM CHARGING IMAGE ERASE EXPOSURE DEVELOPING PAPER FEEDING IMAGE TRANSFER
12
11
8. PAPER SEPARATION 9. CLEANING 10. MAIN ERASE 11. TRANSPORT 12. FUSING 13. PAPER EXIT
1. PC Drum
The PC Drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with a photosensitive semiconductor. It is used as the medium on which a visible developed image of the original is formed. (For more details, see p. M-23.)
2. Drum Charging
The PC Drum Charge Corona Unit is equipped with a single wire and a Scorotron Grid to deposit a uniform negative charge across the entire surface of the PC Drum. (For more details, see p. M-25.)
3. Image Erase
Any areas of charge which are not to be developed are neutralized by lighting up LEDs. (For more details, see p. M-55.)
4. Exposure
Light from the Exposure Lamp reflected off the original is guided to the surface of the PC Drum and reduces the level of the negative charges, thereby forming an electrostatic latent image. (For more details, see p. M-29.)
5. Developing
Toner positively charged in the Developer Mixing Chamber is attracted onto the electrostatic latent image changing it to a visible, developed image. A DC negative bias voltage is applied to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller to prevent toner from being attracted onto those areas of the PC Drum which correspond to the background areas of the original. (For more details, see p. M-62.)
M-2
6. Paper Feeding
Paper is fed either automatically from the 1st or 2nd Drawer, or manually via the Manual Bypass Table (capacity 50 sheets of paper). Each Drawer has fingers that function to separate the top sheet of paper from the rest at take-up. The Manual Bypass Table has a Separator Roll that functions to separate the top sheet of paper from the rest at take-up. (For more details, see p. M-78.)
7. Image Transfer
The single-wire Image Transfer Corona Unit applies a DC negative corona emission to the underside of the paper, thereby attracting toner onto the surface of the paper. (For more details, see p. M-104.)
8. Paper Separation
The single-wire Paper Separator Corona Unit applies an AC corona emission to the underside of the paper to neutralize the paper. In addition, mechanical paper separation is provided by the two PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers fitted to the Imaging Unit. (For more details, see p. M-104.)
9. Cleaning
Residual toner on the surface of the PC Drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade. (For more details, see p. M-108.)
11. Transport
The paper is fed to the Fusing Unit by the Suction Belts. (For more details, see p. M-120.)
12. Fusing
The developed image is permanently fused to the paper by a combination of heat and pressure applied by the Upper and Lower Fusing Rollers. (For more details, see p. M-123.)
M-3
3 DRIVE SYSTEM
The Main Drive Motor provides drive for the entire mechanism of the copier. To help minimize operating noise, timing belts and plastic gears are used in large numbers for the drive train parts.
2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear Cleaning Roller Drive Gear
Suction Unit Drive Gear PC Drum Drive Gear Developing Section Drive Gear Manual Bypass Take-Up Clutch Gear 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Drive Gear Upper Vertical Transport Roller Drive Gear Main Drive Motor Gear Synchronizing Roller Clutch Gear Transport Roller Clutch Gear 1st Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear
1136M002AA
2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Drive Gear Lower Vertical Transport Roller Drive Gear
M-4
4 SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION
A The power cord is plugged into the outlet.
ON ON ON
DC Power Supply Unit PU1 outputs DC24V for Dehumidifying heating. Drum Dehumidifying Only when Drum Heater H3 Dehumidifying Switch S3 and Paper Dehumidifying Paper Dehumidifying Switch Heater H2 S12 are ON
OFF ON ON
H2, H3 PU1 outputs DC24V and DC5V. Power Supply Board PWB-C outputs DC24V. (DC24V line: ON) Master Board PWB-A outputs DC4.7V and DC12V.
ON ON ON
Control panel display Suction Fan Motor M4 turns at half speed. ON Fusing Heater Lamp H1
Approx. 1 sec.
The Lens is detected at the home position. The Mirror is detected at the home position. The Scanner makes its initial motion. The Lens is detected at the full size position. The Mirror is detected at the full size position. For details, see OPTICAL SECTION.
Main Drive Motor M1 and Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 start predrive. M4 turns at full speed. Developing Bias / Paper Separator Corona ON Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON Approx. PC Drum Charge 200 msec. Corona / Image Transfer Corona ON Main Erase Lamp LA3
ON
To on next page
M-5
surface temperature is less than 165C when S1 is turned ON and 15 sec. if the surface temperature is 165C or higher. PC Drum Charge Corona / Image Transfer Corona OFF LA2
Approx. 50 msec.
OFF
M1 / M5 LA3 Approx. 150 msec. OFF Developing Bias / Paper Separator Corona
Approx. 5 sec.
C
The Start Key is pressed. (A4 crosswise paper fed from 1st Drawer, full size, single copy cycle)
The components are energized in order of *1 on the preceding page. ON LA3 Approx. 210 msec. ON ON ON Exposure Lamp LA1
Paper Transport Clutch CL1 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 Approx. 100 msec. SL2
Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 is blocked ( L ). Approx. 110 msec. OFF CL1
The Scanner initiates a scan motion. A LOW Image Leading Edge signal is input to PWB-A. ON LA2 Approx. 140 msec. OFF LA2 ... Leading edge erase
M-6
ON ON
Approx. 200 msec. SCAN signal: H ... The Scanner stops and starts a return motion. OFF Approx. 243 msec. LA1
The trailing edge of the paper moves past Transport Roller Sensor PC54 (unblocked: H ).
Approx. 5 msec.
OFF
CL1
The trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 (unblocked: H ).
OFF
CL2
The trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Exit Switch S53 (ON: H ).
M-7
system;
* MSC (Macro System Controller) Board PWB-B that controls the control
Duplex Unit. In addition to these, each of the control boards for the Data Controller, Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeders, and Sorter/Staple Sorter is equipped with a CPU. The watchdog functions are summarized as follows: * Each of the copier CPUs monitors whether or not it overruns. * The PWB-B monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder and Data Controller. * The PWB-A monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the Sorter and Staple Sorter. * The control boards for the Paper Feed Cabinet and Duplex Unit do not have a CPU in them. Instead, the PWB-A in the copier controls their operations.
Duplexing/ Automatic Document Feeder Control Board (PWB-A)
Copier SCP Board PWB-J Sorter, Staple Sorter MSC Board PWB-B Control Board (PWB-A) Master Board PWB-A Paper Feed Cabinet, Duplex Unit
M-8
5-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing The following processing is performed if a faulty condition is detected in the CPU. The Watchdog Counter available from the Tech. Rep. mode allows the Technical Representative to check if any faulty conditions has occurred in the CPU. For details, see SWITCHES ON PWBs.
Processing (in Standby) 1 : The CPU is automatically reset (i.e., shutting down power to all CPUs including those on the options) as soon as a faulty CPU is detected.
Processing (during Copy Cycle) 1: Same as 1 on the left. 2: Since the paper is left inside the copier, the copier detects a misfed sheet of paper or two when power is turned ON again. If the MSC CPU is faulty, however, all paper in line for the exit will be ejected and all paper headed to the duplex will be stored, before restarting the CPU. 1 : Same as 1, 2, and 3 on the left. 2 : The paper take-up sequence is stopped. 3 : All sheets of paper being fed through the copier are fed out of the copier. 4 : Same as 4, 5, and 6 on the left.
1 : When the CPU malfunctions, the communication to Master Board PWB-A of the copier is cut off or faulty data is transmitted to the PWB-A. 2 : The PWB-A detects that the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter is faulty. 3 : The PWB-A notifies MSC Board PWB-B that the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter is faulty. 4 : As commanded by the PWB-B, Option Relay RY4C is turned OFF and ON to restart the option. 5 : The communication line from the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter to PWB-A is recovered. 6 : PWB-A notifies PWB-B that the CPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter has recovered from the faulty condition.
M-9
Processing (in Standby) 1 : When the CPU malfunctions, the communication to MSC Board PWB-B of the copier is cut off or faulty data is transmitted to the PWB-B. 2 : PWB-B detects that the CPU malfunctions. 3 : As commanded by the PWB-B, Option Relay RY4C is turned OFF and ON to restart the option. 4 : The communication line from the CPU to PWB-B is recovered. 5 : PWB-B detects that the CPU has recovered from the faulty condition.
Processing (during Copy Cycle) 1 : Same as 1 and 2 on the left. 2 : The paper take-up sequence is stopped. 3 : All sheets of paper being fed through the copier are fed out of the copier. 4 : Same as 3, 4, and 5 on the left.
M-10
Image density, To make an initial gradation adjustment of grid voltage (V0) and optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
Regular Correction
Image density
Gradation
To compensate for any drop in the intensity of LA1 light due to a contaminated optical system.
Foggy background
To keep a given toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer in the Developer Mixing Chamber.
Image density, One-Shot Correction gradation (When the Power Switch is turned ON)
To compensate for After making the AIDC Sensor any drop in surface contamination correction, the potential of the PC copier produces a solid-black Drum upon and halftone pattern and, power-up in the through AIDC Sensor control, morning. corrects the grid voltage and optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
M-11
x The following is the block diagram of the image stabilization system. Exposure Lamp LA1 Original Width Scale Original Glass
Halftone Patch
PU2 (PWB-H) EE
PWB-A
Toner Replenishing
HV1
CPU
(UN3)
(UN4) ATDC
AIDC
M-12
[1] AIDC Sensor Variation Adjustment This adjustment is made since the regular current control cannot cover part-to-part variations in the AIDC Sensor (installation, circuit, deterioration, etc.). [Control] The AIDC Sensor LED is turned ON to illuminate the erased surface on the PC Drum.
The 4-bit analog switch selects the load resistance. The output current from the AIDC Sensor goes through the load resistance
selected in step (2) and the resultant voltage is applied to Master Board PWB-A.
The load resistance is switched so that the above voltage becomes 1 V or
M-13
[2] AIDC Sensor Contamination Correction If the Sensor is dirty with toner, it results in an error being produced in the AIDC Sensor output value. The intensity of the AIDC Sensor LED light is therefore varied. [Control] The AIDC Sensor LED is turned ON to illuminate the erased surface on the PC Drum.
The output voltage from the AIDC Sensor is applied to Master Board
PWB-A.
The current that flows through the AIDC Sensor LED is varied so that the
above output voltage becomes 1V. When 1V is obtained, the pulse signal is fixed.
1136C01M
M-14
[3] Grid Voltage (VG) Correction The following five different types of controls are provided for VG correction. The Machine checks the T/C Ratio before the Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4). In case of the detected T/C Ratio is within the Level (1) Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4) will not run. 1: Min. (Setting Level on the Service Mode: 4.5% to 8%) 2% Max. 7% (1) The grid voltage is adjusted at the initial setup or when the PC Drum has been replaced with a new one. [Control] Master Board PWB-A outputs a pulse signal to obtain a grid voltage of 550 V when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after the Drum Counter has been cleared.
With Exposure Lamp LA1 turned OFF, Image Erase Lamp LA2 is kept
more, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG. (2) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the surface potential of a deteriorating PC Drum. [Control] Whenever the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned exceeds the level equivalent to 400 copies, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the voltage corrected last at the end of the last copy cycle for the above event.
With LA1 turned OFF, LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to
range between 4.2 V and 4.4 V, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG . (3) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the surface potential of a cold PC Drum immediately after the copier is turned ON in the morning. [Control]
During predrive after the Power Switch has been turned ON, PWB-A
M-15
(4) The one-shot correction is canceled as the inside temperature of the copier rises. [Control] Upon completion of the copy cycle for every 100 copies made after the Power Switch has been turned ON, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the corrected voltage before one-shot correction.
With LA1 turned OFF, LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to
above voltage becomes 4.2 V or more. If, however, 600 or more copies are made or a standby period of 120 minutes or more elapses after the Power Switch has been turned ON, the one-shot correction is canceled. (5) A correction is made by increasing the grid voltage by 30 V each time the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned exceeds 2,800 minutes if the copier has previously determined that the AIDC Sensor is faulty.
1136C02M
M-16
[4] Optimum Exposure Lamp Voltage Correction (Exposure Correction) The following five different types of controls are provided for the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage correction. The Machine checks the T/C Ratio before the Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4). In case of the detected T/C Ratio is within the Level (1) Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4) will not run. 1: Min. (Setting Level on the Service Mode: 4.5% to 8%) 2% Max. 7% (1) The optimum Exposure Lamp voltage is adjusted at the initial setup or when the PC Drum has been replaced with a new one. [Control] PWB-A outputs a pulse signal to obtain an optimum Exposure Lamp voltage of 58 V when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after the Drum Counter has been cleared.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the
Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied according to the difference
between the above voltage and the target median. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.) (2) The correction is made when the F5 test operation is run after the Exposure Lamp has been cleaned or the SCH-70 (Exposure Lamp voltage adjustment) setting changed. [Control] When the second or subsequent F5 test operation is run, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage set at the last exposure correction.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the
Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied according to the difference
between the above voltage and the target median. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.)
M-17
(3) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the reduced intensity of LA1 light occurring due to a contaminated optical system. [Control] Whenever the cumulative time over which the copier has run exceeds the level equivalent to 5 K copies, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage corrected last at the end of the last copy cycle for the above event.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the
Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied so that the above voltage will fall
within the target range. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.) (4) A correction is made for the intensity of LA1 light equivalent to the changes made in VG by one-shot correction. [Control]
After VG has been corrected in one-shot correction, PWB-A outputs a
pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage set at the last exposure correction.
LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the
Original Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time to produce a halftone pattern.
The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied so that the above voltage will fall
within the target range. (This is done by changing the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.)
M-18
(5) When the copier has found that the AIDC Sensor is faulty, the intensity of LA1 light is increased by 1V each time the time over which the copier has run exceeds 700 minutes. The intensity of LA1 light is also varied in proportion to the changes made in grid voltage varied according to the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned.
1136C03M
M-19
[5] AE Sensor Gain Adjustment The following two different types of controls are provided for the AE Sensor gain adjustment. (1) The AE Sensor gain is adjusted when the F5 or FF test operation is run. [Control] When the F5 or FF test operation is run, the Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate a blank sheet of paper placed on the Original Glass with an optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The AE Sensor gain is varied so that the above voltage becomes 1.8 V
back of the Original Width Scale with the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A and stored in
memory. (2) The AE Sensor gain is corrected as necessary according to the Exposure Lamp voltage changed as a result of "exposure correction." [Control] After the "exposure correction" has been made, the Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the Original Width Scale with the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.
The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A. The AE Sensor gain is adjusted so that the above voltage becomes the
M-20
: AIDC Sensor variation adjustment : AIDC Sensor contamination correction : VG correction : Exposure correction : AE Sensor gain adjustment
Condition Timing
At the initial setup, or when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after the PC Drum has been When F5 or replaced. FF test The second or operation is subsequent F5 test run (Initial operation is run setting) when the SCH-70 (Exposure Lamp voltage adjustment) setting is changed or the Exposure Lamp cleaned. The cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned reaches a level equivalent to 400 copies. The cumulative time over which the copier has run reaches a level equivalent to 5 K copies.
Regular correction
If further During predrive after correction the Power Switch is has been turned ON necessary (one-shot correction). after If further The copier has made correction 100 copies after the is Power Switch has necessary been turned ON. after
M-21
1: VG is corrected, not by the AIDC Sensor, but according to the time over which the PC Drum has turned. 2: If VG has been corrected by 1, the corresponding exposure level is also changed. 3: The optimum Exposure Lamp voltage is corrected, not by the AIDC Sensor, but according to the time over which the copier has run.
M-22
7 PC DRUM
7-1. PC Drum
* The photoconductive drum used in this copier is the organic
aluminum alloy base. The outer of the two layers is called the Charge Transport Layer (CTL), while the inner layer is called the Charge Generating Layer (CGL). * The PC Drum measures 80 mm 350 mm. Handling Precautions This photoconductor exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to light over an extended period of time. It must therefore be protected from light by a clean, soft cloth whenever the PC Unit has been removed from the copier. Further, use utmost care when handling the PC Drum to prevent it from being contaminated.
PC Drum PC Drum Cross-Sectional View CTL CGL Aluminum Cylinder
timing belt and gear from Main Drive Motor M1, is engaged with the flange of the PC Drum. This connects the drive train for the PC Drum. * The PC Drum is grounded to the frame of the copier through the Ground Point inside the rear of the PC Drum and the Drum Holding Shaft. When the PC Unit is slid into the copier, the Drum Holding Shaft contacts the Ground Point inside the PC Drum. This provides for assured grounding of the PC Drum. Conductive grease has been applied to the Ground Point.
Drum Holding Shaft
Conductive Grease
Ground Point
Coupling Gear
M-23
Roller. It is a panel heater that prevents condensation from forming on the surface of the PC Drum.
H3 operates when: * The power cord is plugged into the wall outlet. * Power Switch S1 is in the OFF position. * Drum Dehumidifying Switch S3 is in the ON position. Lower Synchronizing Roller
1136C05M
M-24
8 DRUM CHARGING
8-1. PC Drum Charge Corona
The PC Drum Charge Corona in this copier is equipped with a Scorotron
Grid which ensures that a DC negative charge is evenly deposited across the entire surface of the PC Drum. The grid voltage applied to the Grid Mesh of the PC Drum Charge Corona is varied to compensate for any drop in V0 which could occur with age or under low temperatures in the morning. This ensures stabilized image quality. (For more details, see "6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM.") The Constant-Voltage Circuit in High Voltage Unit HV1 maintains the grid voltage in the range between DC-550V and DC-850V according to the Grid Control pulse (PWM) output from Master Board PWB-A.
HV1 PC Drum Charge Corona
PWB-A
1136M005AA
Grid Mesh
When High Voltage Unit HV1 turns ON, a corona emission from the Corona Wire begins. A grid voltage according to the Grid Control pulse is being applied to the Grid Mesh.
PC
ConstantVoltage Circuit
1136M161AA
IC Vc
HV1
Since there is a potential difference between the Grid Mesh and PC Drum, the negative charges of the corona emission flow through the Grid Mesh to the surface of the PC Drum. This results in the surface being negatively charged. When the potential of the Grid Mesh becomes equal to that of the PC Drum (i.e., when the potential of the PC Drum becomes the grid voltage set by the Grid Control pulse), the negative corona current flows from the Grid Mesh through HV1 to the ground.
ConstantVoltage Circuit PC
M-25
Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal output from pin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A. The Grid Control pulse signal is output after the Power Switch has been turned ON. <Operation> The Image Erase Lamp LA2 MODE signal is output.
Approx. 200 msec. later
Master Board PWB-A The LOW Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal is output from pin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A.
The Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona output from High Voltage Unit HV1 is turned ON. Paper Exit Switch S53 is actuated (when the trailing edge of the paper moves past S53).
Approx. 50 msec. later
Master Board PWB-A The HIGH Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal is output from pin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A. The Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona output from HV1 is turned OFF.
Image Erase Lamp H (LA2) L Paper Exit Switch ON (S53) OFF PC Drum Charge/Image ON Transfer Coronas OFF
1136T30MCA
Approx. 200msec.
Approx. 50msec.
M-26
1136C06M
Ozone Filter, as the air is drawn out of the copier by Suction Fan Motor M4 through the Duct located to the left of the PC Drum Charge Corona.
Ozone Filter
Duct
M-27
9 OPTICAL SECTION
9-1. Construction
As the Scanner is moved by Scanner Motor M2, the light from Exposure
Lamp LA1 is reflected off the original and guided through the six Mirrors onto the surface of the PC Drum to form the electrostatic latent image.
5 7 6 8 2 9
4 3
10 12 15 14 18 16 13 11
17
1. Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 2. Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 3. Scanner 4. Lens 5. Scanner Motor M2 6. Scanner Shaft 7. Mirror Motor M7 8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage 9. 4th Mirror
10. 5th Mirror 11. 6th Mirror 12. Lens Motor M6 13. AE Sensor Board PWB-H 14. Exposure Lamp LA1 15. 1st Mirror 16. 2nd Mirror 17. 3rd Mirror 18. 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage
M-28
9-2. Exposing
Book 2 3
Original Glass
The Auxiliary Reflector reflects light onto the areas that Exposure Lamp LA1 cannot illuminate when an original that does not lie flat on the Original Glass (such as a book) is being used. It functions to reduce shadows which would otherwise be transferred to the copy. The intensity of the light emitted by LA1 remains flat. The intensity is slightly attenuated at the very ends, which is corrected by the Intensity Correction Mirrors fitted on the front and rear ends of the Scanner. The four Aperture Plates regulate the amount of LA1 light illuminating the original surface. Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse TF2 becomes electrically open (blows) if the temperature in the area surrounding the Main Reflector exceeds 128C, thus cutting off the circuit to LA1. The Main Reflector ensures that light from LA1 exposes all areas of the original. This copier uses a halogen frost lamp for Exposure Lamp LA1. Its light distribution characteristics keep the intensity of the light remaining flat.
: :
M-29
duty ratio of the pulse width of the Exposure Lamp Control signal (AVR PWM) output from Master Board PWB-A. For possible contamination of the Optical System and to incorporate any correction made in the grid voltage, the copier automatically varies the optimum intensity of the Exposure Lamp light and adjusts AE Sensor gain to ensure stabilized image quality. (See "6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM.")
<To lower the image density, the Lamp voltage is increased>
t H L T
t'
(t<t')
(t>t')
1136T31MCB
(1) Automatic Exposure Control <Overview> The copier is provided with the Auto Exposure mode in which the voltage applied to Exposure Lamp LA1 is automatically increased or decreased as necessary so that copies of consistent quality are produced regardless of whether, for example, the original has a dark background or is a pencil line drawing. AE Sensor Board PWB-H (beside the Lens) measures the intensity of the light reflected off the 3rd Mirror, which results in the black/white ratio of an area of 210 mm (W) 6 mm (L) of the original being measured. As the original is being scanned in the Auto Exposure mode, PWB-H senses the image density of the original (or the intensity of the light reflected) on a real-time basis. In this mode, the copier either increases or decreases the Exposure Lamp voltage according to the difference between the AE Sensor output and reference voltage during the period between when the Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) is output and when LA1 is turned OFF.
Original 3rd Mirror
6mm
Surface of Original
210mm
Scan Direction
Exploded View A Given Distance AE Sensor Board PWB-H AE Sensor Board PWB-H Slit This area corresponds to a 210-mm-wide band across the original.
3rd Mirror
M-30
<Operation> Master Board PWB-A A pulse signal is sent from pin 17 (P50/TA1) of IC1A to light up LA1 for the center manual exposure setting (EXP5). A LOW Exposure Lamp ON signal is output from pin 49 (APA1) of IC4A.
Power Supply Unit PU2 The pulse signal is input to pin 3 of PJ19 and PU2 sets the Lamp voltage according to that signal.
LA1 turns ON. During the copy cycle, a LOW Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) is output and the automatic exposure control begins. AE Sensor Board PWB-H PD1H detects the intensity of the light striking it and PWB-H converts the light intensity to a corresponding voltage value, outputting it via pin 7 of IC1H. (The higher the intensity of the light striking PD1H, the lower the output voltage.)
Master Board PWB-A The analog voltage from PWB-H is input to pin 1 (AN0) of IC1A. PWB-A compares the input voltage with the reference voltage and increases the Lamp voltage if the input voltage is higher than the reference, and decreases it if the input is lower than the reference. This is accomplished by varying the duty ratio of the pulse signal output from pin 17 (P50/TA0) of IC1A.
* The reference voltage value varies depending on the "Auto Expo. Level"
setting of the Users Choice. It also depends on the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage under that setting.
Optimum Exposure Lamp Voltage Choice Lighter Normal Darker 1.45 1.80 2.15 1.53 1.80 2.07 1.59 1.80 2.01 (Unit: V) 56V or Less 57V to 63V 64V or More
M-31
(2) Manual Exposure Control When either one of the Exposure Control Keys on the control panel is pressed, it sets the copier into the Manual Exposure mode. In this mode, the copier permits the user to vary the Lamp voltage (i.e. the exposure level) in nine different steps. <Operation> Press the Exposure Control Key as necessary. Master Board PWB-A The exposure level data is sent from the control panel to IC1A via MSC Board PWB-B through MINET communications. The exposure level data is then converted in IC1A to a pulse signal and output from pin 17 (P50/TA0) of IC1A. A LOW Exposure Lamp ON signal is output from pin 49 (APA1) of IC4A. Power Supply Unit PU2 The pulse signal is input to pin 3 of PJ19. According to this signal, PU2 sets the Lamp voltage (which can be varied in nine steps according to the exposure setting.)
The intensity of the light emitted by Exposure Lamp LA1 becomes greater or smaller accordingly. (3) Exposure Lamp LA1 ON/OFF Control x Exposure Lamp ON Timing Exposure Lamp LA1 is turned ON T msec. after the PC Drum Charge Corona and Image Transfer Corona have been turned ON following the press of the Start Key. The Lamp ON timing varies for each different paper source. During a multi-copy cycle, LA1 is turned ON again approx. 90 msec. after it has been turned OFF. x Exposure Lamp OFF Timing LA1 is turned OFF approx. 243 msec. after the SCEND signal, which is being input to Master Board PWB-A from SCP Board PWB-J, has gone from HIGH to LOW.
1st Copy ON PC Drum Charge Corona/ Image Transfer Corona OFF SCEND Signal H L Tmsec. Approx. 243msec. 2nd Copy
M-32
1136C07M
M-33
9-4. Intensity Correction (1) Because of the nature of the Lens, the intensity of the Exposure Lamp light after passing through the Lens tends to be higher at the center and lower towards both ends. To solve this problem, there is a Lens Aperture Cover installed at the back of the Lens. It limits the amount of light at the center to ensure that an even amount of light strikes the surface of the PC Drum.
(2) When a zoom ratio is large, it results in the intensity of light striking the surface of the PC Drum decreasing. To correct the varying intensity of the light striking the surface of the PC Drum in different zoom ratios, the Lamp voltage is increased according to the set zoom ratio in the Manual Exposure mode and a correction is made for the AE Sensor input voltage to increase the Lamp voltage in the Auto Exposure mode.
Manual Exposure Correction Coefficient Lamp Voltage (V) 0.500~0.549 0.550~0.949 0.950~1.099 1.100~1.399 1.400~1.749 1.750~2.000 +2 +1 0 +1 +2 +4 Auto Exposure Correction Coefficient Equivalent Lamp Voltage (V) +2 +1 0 +1 +2 +4
Zoom Range
M-34
Motor M2 through the Scanner Drive Cable, gears and timing belt.
Shaft in the rear of the copier. While at the front end, there is a Slide Collar attached to each of the bodies and that Collar slides over the Slide Rail. The speed of the Scanner varies with different zoom ratios (150.0 mm/second in the full size mode). Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 detects the home position of the Scanner. It determines the reference position for the scan motion.
Scanner Motor M2 Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 Scanner Rear Scanner Shaft
9-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control <Overview> A DC servomotor is used for Scanner Motor M2. The pulse width modulation, or PWM, control is employed in which the average voltage is controlled by varying the width of the Scanner drive pulse which is the voltage input to the Motor. A photosensor and a pulse disk are built into M2. Their function is to convert the Motor shaft speed into the corresponding series of pulses. This pulse signal is input to SCP Board PWB-J. PWB-J then calculates the Motor speed using the period of the pulse signal applied to it and controls the Scanner drive pulse which is to be applied to the Motor. This effectively stabilizes the Motor speed. The pulse signal applied to PWB-J is also used to determine the distance over which the Scanner should travel. This distance is represented by the number of pulses corresponding to each paper size and zoom ratio.
M-35
<Scan/Return Switching and Braking of Scanner Motor M2> Scanner Motor M2 is turned forward to move the Scanner in the scan direction, turned backward to move the Scanner in the return direction, or braked by the Motor Forward and Motor Backward signals input from pins 13 and 15 of IC3J on SCP Board PWB-J. Details are as follows.
Motor Forward Signal (Pin 13 of IC3J) Turns Forward Turns Backward Braked (in Scan Motion) Braked (in Return Motion) H L L H Motor Backward Signal (Pin 15 of IC3J) L H H L
builds up its speed to the maximum level during the return motion. The Motor Backward signal is first alternated between HIGH and LOW states to reduce the input voltage to M2 to a low level. After M2 is decelerated to a given speed through this operation, the above brake control is performed.
Braking Motor Forward Signal (Pin 13 of IC3J) Motor Backward Signal (Pin 15 of IC3J) Scanner Motor M2 Deceleration Braking
1136T33MCB
<Scanner Speed Control> The speed of Scanner Motor M2 is controlled by varying the width of the Scanner drive pulse which is output from pin 38 of IC2J on SCP Board PWB-J. (This means that the current flowing through M2 is varied.)
Scanner Drive Pulse (Pin 38 of IC2J) Output Waveform
Period T
High-Speed Rotation
Pulse Width t
1136T34MCA
Period T
Low-Speed Rotation
1136T35MCA
M-36
<Scan/Return Motion>
x These are the signals used during the scan and return motion: ENABLE signal : Input from the master CPU to SCP. Enables the operation of each load of the optical system when LOW and disables the operation of all loads when HIGH. SCAN signal BASE signal : Input from the master CPU to SCP and requests a scan motion when LOW. : Input from the SCP to master CPU and indicates the image leading edge position. Serves also as the reference for setting the scan length. : Input from the SCP to master CPU and controls the start of the Synchronizing Roller when LOW. : Input from the SCP to master CPU and gives an advance notice of the completion of a scan motion when LOW. : Input from Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 to SCP and detects the Scanner at the home position when LOW. Serves also as the reference for a scan motion.
SCAN Signal
BASE Signal 1 TRON Signal 2 SCEND Signal Lens/Mirrors Motion Move Initial Operation Move
1136T48MCA
1 2
: The LOW BASE signal is output after a given distance is traveled after the PC81 output has gone HIGH. : The LOW TRON signal is output after the lapse of a given period of time plus correction [A-4 (Lens Full Size Position Adjustment), A-5 (Lens Position Reduction Registration), and A-11 (Lens Position Enlargement Registration) of Adjust Mode] after the BASE signal has gone LOW. : The LOW SCEND signal is output approx. 200 msec. before the Scanning finish.
M-37
1136C08M
M-38
9-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control (1) Lens Drive Mechanism The Lens is moved by the Lens Drive Cable to which drive is transmitted from Lens Motor M6. A two-phase stepping motor is used for M6. The Motor is turned forward or backward by the pulse signals output from SCP Board PWB-J, thus moving the Lens in either the reduction or enlargement direction. When a zoom ratio is selected, pulse signals from PWB-J are input to the Lens Motor. The Motors shaft turns 7.5 per step, which is equivalent to approx. 0.2 mm of linear Lens movement.
Lens
Lens Motor M6
In this copier, registration for the original is determined at the rear left
corner, while that for the PC Drum is at the front side. For this reason, there is a Lens Position Correction Cam that moves the Lens slantwise. The Lens Moving Plate moves linearly on a shaft, while the Lens Holder is movable on the Lens Moving Plate. The one roll of the Lens Holder is fitted in the groove of the Lens Position Correction Cam via slits in the Lens Moving Plate. This means that the Lens Holder moves along a curved trajectory which is drawn by the Lens Position Correction Cam, though the Lens Moving Plate makes a linear motion.
Lens
Lens Holder
Shaft
M-39
(2) Lens Reference Position Detection Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90 is used to detect the Lens at the reference position when the copier is turned ON. The Lens should be at the reference position when the Sensor output goes from LOW (enlargement side) to HIGH (reduction side). The Lens moves from this position a distance equivalent to the correction [Adjust Mode A-1 (Lens Full Size Position Adjustment)] to arrive at the full size position.
x Operation When Power is Turned ON When the Lens is located on the enlargement side (PC90 is LOW)
Lens Motor M6 turns forward to move the Lens in the reduction direction. M6 stops and starts turning backward when the PC90 output goes from
LOW to HIGH.
After being driven 32 steps from when the PC90 output goes from HIGH
to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.
M6 stops turning when the PC90 output goes from LOW to HIGH. (The
Lens is now at the home position.)
The Scanner makes the initial motion. After the Scanner has completed the initial motion, M6 starts turning
backward to move the Lens in the enlargement direction.
After being driven 100 steps from when the PC90 output goes from
HIGH to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.
After being driven 200 steps, M6 stops and starts turning backward. After being driven 32 steps from when the PC90 output goes from HIGH
to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.
M6 temporarily stops turning when the PC90 output goes from LOW to
HIGH.
11
M6 starts turning forward again and moves the Lens a distance equivalent to the correction. It then stops. (The Lens is now at the full size position.)
M6 turns backward to move the Lens in the enlargement direction. The subsequent operations are the same as those in to 11 above.
M-40
M6 is driven through the number of steps according to the setting of Adjust Mode A-1 to move the Lens in the reduction direction.
For an enlargement ratio
M6 is driven through the number of steps according to the setting of Adjust Mode A-1 plus 32, to move the Lens in the enlargement direction. M6 is then driven another 32 steps to move the Lens in the reduction direction.
Forward Rotation
1 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 Backward Rotation
1136T37MCB
1136T37MCA
NOTES: To enhance Lens positioning accuracy, the Lens is always brought to the full size position from the enlargement side. This compensates for the error produced by backlash in the drive gears and part-to-part variations in the Lens Moving Plate. The operations from through are performed to check for possible binding of the Lens moving mechanism. (These operations are not performed when the Front Door is closed.)
M-41
given sequence (sequence of pulse signals output from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 of IC5J on SCP Board PWB-J) to determine the direction of rotation. When M6 is turned forward (reduction direction), the outputs from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 are in the order of step 4, step 3, step 2, and step 1. When M6 is turned backward (enlargement direction), the outputs from these pins are in the order of step 1, step 2, step 3, and step 4.
IC5J
Pin 2
Pin 7
Pin 10
Pin 15
Forward Rotation Backward Rotation
M-42
1136C09M
M-43
9-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control (1) 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism
To ensure that a focused image of the original is reproduced on the
surface of the PC Drum when in an enlargement or reduction mode, the distance between the original and the surface of the PC Drum (conjugation distance) must be greater than that when in the full size mode. To accomplish this, the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is moved in the direction of a greater conjugation distance (+ direction). The 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is moved by the rack gear fitted to the 4th/5th Mirrors Guide Plate, which is in mesh with the pinion gear. Mirror Motor M7 gives drive to this pinion gear. M7 is a two-phase stepping motor. The Motor is turned forward or backward by the pulse signals output from SCP Board PWB-J, thus moving the Carriage in the required direction. When a zoom ratio is selected, pulse signals from PWB-J are input to M7. The Motors shaft turns 7.5 per step, which is equivalent to approx. 0.09 mm of linear Mirrors Carriage movement.
Pinion Gear
M7
output goes from LOW ( side) to HIGH (+ side). The carriage moves from this position a distance equivalent to the correction [Adjust Mode A-2 (Mirror Full Size Position Adjustment)] to arrive at the full size position.
M-44
x Operation When Power is Turned ON When the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is located on the + side (PC86 is HIGH)
After the Lens has been detected at its home position, Mirror Motor M7
turns backward to move the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage in the direction.
M7 stops and starts turning forward when the PC86 output goes from
HIGH to LOW.
M7 stops turning when the PC86 output goes from LOW to HIGH. (The
carriage is now at the home position.)
The Scanner makes the initial motion. After the Lens has been detected at its home position, M7 turns forward
100 steps before stopping and then starting to turn backward.
After being driven 3 steps from when the PC86 output goes from HIGH to
LOW, M7 stops and starts turning forward.
M7 temporarily stops turning when the PC86 output goes from LOW to
HIGH.
After the Lens has been detected at the full size position, M7 starts
turning forward again and moves the carriage a distance equivalent to the correction. It then stops. (The carriage is now at the full size position.)
When the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is located on the side (PC86 is LOW)
After the Lens has been detected at its home position, M7 turns forward
to move the carriage in the + direction.
M7 turns backward the required number of steps plus 3, then turns forward 3 steps before stopping.
M-45
1 2 3
Backward Rotation
Forward Rotation
1 3
5 6 7 After Lens Has Been Detected at Full Size Position 8 Full Size Position
1136T38MCB
1136T38MCA
NOTES: To enhance positioning accuracy, the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is always brought to the full size position from the side. This compensates for the error produced by backlash in the drive gears. The operations from through are performed to check for possible binding of the carriage moving mechanism. (These operations are not performed when the Front Door is closed.)
M-46
a given sequence (sequence of pulse signals output from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 of IC6J on SCP Board PWB-J) to determine the direction of rotation. When M7 is turned forward (+ direction), the outputs from pins 2, 7, 10, and 15 are in the order of step 1, step 2, step 3, and step 4. When M7 is turned backward ( direction), the outputs from these pins are in the order of step 4, step 3, step 2, and step 1.
Operation Order Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4
L L H H
IC6J
Pin 2
Pin 7
Pin 10
Pin 15
Forward Rotation Backward Rotation
Direction. Direction.
1136H49MCA
NOTE: See "Lens Motor M6 Control" for circuit diagram (p. M-43).
M-47
Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 PC118 (Option) Size Reset Switch S108 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 PC117 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 PC116
Control Panel
M-48
10-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) 10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor
The original size detecting sensors determine the distance between the
sensor and the original, which enables the detection of originals with high image density (Original density up to 0.6). All sensors are fixed to the Optical Base Plate, enhancing measuring accuracy. A movable sensor had a problem of false detection due to its position being moved. Each sensor has two LEDs and one photo receiver (PSD). Since the CD (crosswise) sensors (PC115, 119) are installed at a height different from FD (feeding-direction) sensors (PC116, 117, 118), each type has a different setting distance as detailed below. CD sensors: Setting distance 115 mm FD sensors: Setting distance 60 mm CD Sensor
LED1 PSD LED1
FD Sensor
PSD
LED2
LED2
Each sensor has a built-in signal processing circuit that outputs 8-bit serial
Regulator PSD
Vcc
Data Output
GND
1136M153CA
LED2
M-49
intensity that exceeds a predetermined level, the detection system determines that an original is placed within the Setting Distance of the Sensor.
Setting Distance
M-50
sizes that can be detected. (Metric Area) Standard: CD1 (PC115), FD1 (PC116), FD2 (PC117) Optional: CD2 (PC119), FD3 (PC118) (Inch Area) Standard: CD1 (PC115), FD2 (PC117) Optional: FD1 (PC116), FD3 (PC118) NOTE: If the optional sensors are installed, set Jumper Connector JP2 on UN2 as illustrated below and run the F7 operation.
FD 2 FD3 (Option) FD 1 Letter C Letter L Legal 11" 17" FLS Width (Inch) Width (Metric)
Length (Inch)
A5L B5L A4L B4L, B5C A3L, A4C CD2 (Option) CD 1 B5C A4C, B5L A4L A5L B4L A3L
Invoice
Length (Metric)
L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise
FD1 is mounted
Position of JP1
Position of JP2
M-51
original size detecting sensors (PC115 to 119). By comparing the data from each sensor with the threshold level, it determines whether there is an original placed on the Original Glass. UN2 then determines the size of the original according to the combination of the data. (Metric Area)
Original Size A3L B4L A4L A5L A4C Letter L: 8-1/2" 11" 11" 17" Legal: 8-1/2" 14" FLS: 8-1/2" 13" Letter C: 11"8-1/2" No Original FD1 FD2 Size Determined LED2 LED1 LED2 by UN2 A3T (A3L) O O O B4T (B4L) O O O A4T (A4L) O O O q A5T (A5L) O q A4Y (A4C) O q q Letter L (Letter L) 11" 17" (A3L) Legal (A4L) FLS (A4L) Letter C (A4C) No Original O O O O O q O O O O q q q O O O q q FD3 CD1 CD2
LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 O(O) O(O) q(q) q(q) q(q) O(q) O(q) q(q) q(q) q(q) O q q q O l O q q O q O O q q O q O q q O q O(O) q(q) q(q) q(q) O(O) q(q) q(O) q(q) q(q) q(O) q(q)
q(q) q(q) O(O) O(q) O(q) O(q) O(q) q(q) q(q) q(q) q(q) q(q)
(Inch Area)
FD1 FD2 FD3 CD1 Size Determined LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 Original Size by UN2 11" 17" 11" 17" (11" 17") O(O) O O O(O) O(O) O O q Legal: 8-1/2" 14" Legal (Legal) O(O) O O O(O) O(O) q Letter L: 8-1/2" 11" Letter L (Letter L) O(O) O q q(q) q(q) q q Letter C: 11"8-1/2" Letter C (Letter C) O(O) q q q(q) q(q) O O q FLS: 8-1/2" 13" FLS (Legal) O(O) O O O(O) q(O) q Invoice: q q(q) q(q) q q Invoice (No Original) O(q) q 5-1/2" 8-1/2" No Original No Original q(q) q q q(q) q(q) q q * O: Original Present
Sensor FD1 (PC116) and LED2 of CD2 (PC119) for the determination of the original size.
* Any non-standard size is rounded off to the nearest standard size.
M-52
The Original Cover is left LEDs of Original Size Detecting Sensors PC115 to open. 119 project light onto the original and the photo receivers of the sensors receive the reflected light to * Original Cover Angle transmit the corresponding data to Original Size Detecting Sensor Detecting Board UN2. PC111 remains deactivated. UN2 determines the original size based on the combination of the output data from the original size detecting sensors. UN2 divides the original size data into two parts and transmits 4-bit parallel data to Master Board PWB-A approx. every 73 msec. PWB-A combines the 4-bit original size data back into 8-bit data and stores it in memory.
The Original Cover is lowered to an angle less than 15. * PC111 is activated. The Original Cover is completely lowered. * The magnets fitted to the Original Cover actuate Size Reset Switch S108.
The original size data is latched when PC111 is activated and the original size is set.
The copier selects the appropriate paper size based on the set original size data and selects the paper source loaded with paper of that size, with the paper size indicated on the control panel (when in the Auto Paper or Size mode). If the copier is unable to find the target paper size, it lights up the Add Paper Indicator. The set original size data and selected paper size are reset.
The Original Cover is raised to an angle less than 15 * S108 is deactuated. * PC111 remains activated. The Original Cover is raised to an angle more than 15. * PC111 is deactivated.
The copier proceeds with the next original size detection sequence.
* If the Start Key is pressed with the Original Cover raised (PC111 is
deactivated and S108 deactuated), UN2 transmits the original size data available when the Start Key is pressed to Master Board PWB-A for the selection of the paper size.
M-53
1136C11M
M-54
6th Mirror
PC Drum
M-55
11-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control 11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output Master Board PWB-A outputs 32-bit ON pattern data (DATA) to Image Erase Lamp LA2 to turn ON and OFF particular LEDs of LA2. The ON pattern data is divided into four blocks of data (each 8 bits) output every 5 msec. Signals sent from PWB-A are as follows: DATA: Indicates which LED to turn ON or OFF of LA2. CLK: MODE: STROBE: Synchronizing signal to transmit data serially. Latches the LED ON/OFF data sent from PWB-A. Outputs the latched LED ON/OFF data to turn ON the corresponding LEDs.
11-2-2. Leading Edge Erase All LA2 LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) to erase the image along the leadingedge. The erase time varies depending on whether SCH-20 (Leading Edge Erase) of the Tech. Rep. Choice is set to "Erase" or "Not Erase" and on the control panel setting. See Table below.
SCH-20 "Erase" (4 mm) Normal Erase Width Setting Image Erase Width Timer 4 140 File Margin 10 15 20 "Not Erase" Normal File Margin 10 15 20 10 10 15 20 Frame Erase Punch Hole Erase
Function
14
19
24
10
15
20
10
10
15
20
M-56
11-2-3. Edge Erase The 40 LEDs of LA2 are turned ON and OFF as follows according to the zoom ratio or paper size to erase unnecessary charges along both the front and rear edges of the image.
The LEDs are turned ON according to the paper size in the full size mode. In any zoom ratio other than full size, LEDs are turned ON according to the LEDs are turned ON according to the zoom ratio in manual bypass
copying which circumvents paper size detection. The 40 LEDs are classified into 32 groups as follows and they are turned ON or OFF by groups for edge erase.
Group No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LED No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Image Width (mm) 300 292 284 277 267 260 251 244 235 229 220 212 203 194 184 174 Group No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 LED No. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2735 36 37 38 39 40 Image Width (mm) 166 158 150 142 153 126 116 107 99 93
paper size or zoom ratio whichever causes more LEDs to light up.
Numbers are assigned to the LEDs so that the front LED is 40, looking at The "image width" refers to the unexposed image area between the LEDs
numbered from 1 to the corresponding opposite ones that are turned ON. the copier from the front.
M-57
~0.449 0.500~0.550 0.551~0.576 0.577~0.610 0.611~0.642 0.643~0.672 0.673~0.698 0.699~0.728 0.729~0.758 0.759~0.776 0.777~0.806 0.807~0.830 0.831~0.854 0.855~0.882 0.883~0.914 0.915~0.938 0.939~0.964 0.965~0.990 0.991~
M-58
11-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase All LA2 LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period time after the lapse of a certain time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated a SCEND signal to erase the image along the trailing edge. The erase start timing varies depending on whether SCH-21 (Trailing Edge Erase) of the Tech. Rep. Choice is set to "Erase" or "Not Erase" and on the control panel setting. See Table below.
SCH-20 "Erase" (7 mm) Normal Erase Width Setting Image Erase Width Timer 7 290 File Margin 10 15 20 "Not Erase" Normal File Margin 10 15 20 10 10 15 20 Frame Erase Punch Hole Erase
Function
17
22
27
0 335
10
15
20
10 270
10
15
20
11-2-5. Center Erase All LA2 LEDs are turned ON after the lapse of a certain time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) to erase the image at the center of the paper. The erase start timing varies for different paper sizes and erase widths as shown below. The erase time depends on the erase width. Erase Start Timing
Paper Size Paper Length Erase Start Timing
10mm 15mm 20mm
A4L 297
A3L 420
11" 279
17" 432
Unit: Paper Length = mm, Erase Start Timing = msec. L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise
Erase Time
Erase Width 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm Erase Time 45 msec. 80 msec. 115 msec.
M-59
11-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase When only a single original is placed on the Original Glass in the 2-in-1 mode (using Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder), the copier erases the area where no originals are present. Different controls are provided depending on whether "Odd" is specified on the control panel for the number of originals to be used. If "Odd" is specified, all LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period of time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) to erase the first half page of the last original.
Paper Size Paper Length Erase Time A4C 210 815 A4L 297 A3L 420 A5C 149 610 B4L 364 1330 B5L 257 970 B5C 182 720 8.5" 216 835 11" 279 17" 432
1105 1515
1045 1555
If "Odd" is not specified, all LEDs are turned ON after the lapse of a given period of time after PWB-J has generated a BASE signal to erase the last half page of the first original.
Paper Size Paper Length Timer A4C 210 835 A4L 297 A3L 420 A5C 149 630 B4L 364 1350 B5L 257 990 B5C 182 740 8.5" 216 855 11" 279 17" 432
1125 1535
1065 1575
M-60
1136C12M
M-61
12 DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER
12-1. Construction
x Developing Unit This copier employs the New Micro-Toning developing system which
supplies toner from the Developing Unit to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the PC Drum to form a visible, developed toner image of the original. One part of the Magnet Roller provides a very weak magnetic force, which effectively prevents developer from being compacted and clogging at the Doctor Blade.
Bucket Roller Doctor Blade Developer Conveying Screw Toner Mixing Screw
x Hopper Toner is supplied to the Developing Unit by turning the Toner Bottle to drop
toner down into the Sub Hopper. As Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 turns, toner in the Toner Bottle is fed to the Sub Hopper which, in turn, conveys the toner to the Developing Unit using the drive from Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9.
Toner Bottle Coupling Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35
Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever
M-62
makes contact with that of Coupling Gear 2 when the PC Unit is slid into the copier, spring-loaded Coupling Gear 2 is pushed back toward the rear of the copier allowing the PC Unit to be slid into position. When drive is later transmitted to the Developing Unit, Coupling Gear 2 is pushed to the front by the tension of the spring to mesh positively with Coupling Gear 1. Copier Drive from Main Drive Motor M1 is transmitted via Timing Belt B to Gear A. Gear C is turned by Gear B, causing Coupling Gear 2 to turn clockwise.
Developing Unit As Coupling Gear 1 turns clockwise, the Bucket Roller mounted on the same shaft as Coupling Gear 1 is turned.
Gear D is turned clockwise by an intermediate gear. The Sleeve/Magnet Roller is turned clockwise. The Bucket Roller is turned clockwise.
Gears E and F are turned counterclockwise by intermediate gears. The Developer Conveying and Toner Mixing Screws are turned counterclockwise.
M-63
Mixing Screw, Developer Conveying Screw, Bucket Roller, and Sleeve/Magnet Roller are turned.
Developer Conveying Screw Bucket Roller Sleeve/Magnet Roller
Toner is supplied through the Toner Supply Port from the Sub Hopper. The Toner Mixing Screw agitates the toner, while conveying it from the front to the rear end of the Unit. The Developer Conveying Screw mixes the toner with the developer, conveying them from the rear to the front end. The ATDC Sensor senses the toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer mixed and conveyed by the Developer Conveying Screw. The developer conveyed to the front end of the Unit is then conveyed onto the Bucket Roller. The Bucket Roller agitates and triboelectrically charges the developer, supplying it to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller. Part of the developer fed to the rear end of the Unit by the Bucket Roller is guided back onto the Developer Conveying Screw.
Rear of Copier
M-64
: The principal magnetic pole having the strongest magnetic flux density. Therefore, when toner is attracted to the latent image, the carrier is firmly held onto the Sleeve Roller.
S1, N2: The height of the developer brush is held low so that the developer can be smoothly recycled. These poles also prevent the developer from scattering. N3
Uncovered Surface Areas of Weak Magnetic Force
: This pole causes the developer bristles on the surface of the Sleeve Roller to stand up straight so that their height will be regulated evenly by the Doctor Blade. : Since the gap between N3 and N1 is wide, this pole ensures that the developer is positively conveyed to the point of development. : This pole provides a very weak magnetic force. If developer is compacted and clogs at the Doctor Blade and, as a result, part of the surfaces of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller is not covered with developer, the nearby developer around S2b goes to those uncovered surfaces because of its weak magnetic force. This helps prevent blank lines from occurring on the copy.
S2a
Moving Developer Sleeve/Magnet Roller
S2b
M-65
Since the Developing Unit and PC Drum are housed in the PC Unit in this
copier, the Magnet Roller has been made movable: the Bushing is pressed by compression springs thereby pressing the Positioning Collars on both ends of the Magnet Roller against the PC Drum. This ensures a given distance between the PC Drum and the Sleeve/Magnet Roller.
Movable Bushing
Compression Spring
M-66
Roller to prevent a foggy background on the copy. The amount of toner attracted onto the surface of the PC Drum depends on how much lower the PC Drum surface potential (Vi) is than Vb (i.e., the potential difference). Because the Magnet Roller of this copier is movable, a flat spring is fitted to the Bias Terminal, allowing the Bias Terminal to follow the movement of the Magnet Roller.
Start Key ON
OFF
Approx. 150msec.
1136T33MCA
1136C13M
M-67
Chamber detects the varying toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer, which is circulated by the Developer Conveying Screw, as changes in the magnetic flux density. The magnetic flux density is converted to a corresponding voltage value which is applied to the analog port of IC1A on Master Board PWB-A. IC1A compares the ATDC Sensor output voltage with the reference voltage for 6% toner-to-carrier ratio [which can be varied by the ATDC Detection Level Mode (Tech. Rep. Choice SCH-90)] to control toner replenishment.
x ATDC Sensor Automatic Adjustment/Detection Circuit The sensitivity of the ATDC Sensor is automatically adjusted to the
starter with a 6% T/C when the F8 test operation is run after fresh starter has been loaded.
The output voltage from the ATDC Sensor is applied to Analog Port AN1 of IC1A. IC1A checks to see whether the voltage input to it is 2.5 V. The voltage is 2.5 V. The voltage is NOT 2.5 V.
The output voltage from pin 1 of IC23A is fixed as the reference voltage.
The ATDC Sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the initial starter T/C (6%).
The output voltage from pin 1 of IC23A is varied. The voltage is decreased if the input voltage is 2.5 V or more. The voltage is increased if the input voltage is less than 2.5 V.
The Sensor output voltage applied to IC1A is compared with the reference voltage (2.5 V SCH-90 setting) and, if it is higher than the reference, Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is energized.
M-68
1136C14M
6
Reference Voltage ATDC Output Voltage
Low
Normal High
Set T/C 4. 0 % 4. 5 % 5. 0 % 5. 5 % 6. 0 % 6. 5 % 7. 0 % 7. 5 %
Reference Voltage 2. 943 V 2. 825 V 2. 717 V 2. 608 V 2. 500 V 2. 391 V 2. 283 V 2. 174 V
M-69
The ATDC Sensor reads the toner-to-carrier ratio data at the following
timing to provide the basis for toner replenishing control: The ATDC Sensor takes the reading for a 500-msec. period at 5-msec. intervals 20 msec. after a LOW Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) from SCP Board PWB-J has been input to Master Board PWB-A for each copy made.
The mean value of the readings sampled is compared with the voltage
(target value) corresponding to the T/C set by SCH-90 and the result is classified as follows: a) The mean value is lower than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is higher than the set ratio by 1% or more. b) The mean value is lower than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is higher than the set ratio by less than 1%. c) The mean value is higher than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is lower than the set ratio by less than 0.5%. d) The mean value is higher than the target value and represents a T/C ratio that is lower than the set ratio by 0.5% or more.
Paper Size
M-70
before being fed to the Developing Unit. This is done to stabilize replenishing of toner and detection of a toner-empty condition. The toner replenishing time (the period of time during which Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is kept energized) is determined according to the ATDC Sensor output level (which varies in three steps). After the ATDC Sensor detection
Toner Empty Detecting Lever From Main Hopper Toner Mixing Lever
Sub Hopper Gear A Gear B Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 Toner Supply Port Rear
1136M031AA
M9 is kept energized for a given period of time. [A LOW Remote signal is output from pin 50 (APA2) of IC4A on PWB-A.] Gear A mounted on the M9 shaft is turned counterclockwise. Gear C is turned counterclockwise via Gear B. The Toner Conveying Screw turns counterclockwise, causing toner to fall into the Toner Supply Port through the Toner Supply Hole. The Toner Mixing Screw then conveys the toner fallen onto it to the rear end of the Developing Unit.
Gear C
1136C15M
M-71
to the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever and Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106. The S106 ON signal is used to energize Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8. <Mechanism> The Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever rides over the eccentric cam installed at the rear end of the Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever. When drive from M9 is transmitted to the Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever, the Toner Empty Detecting Lever is moved up and down.
When the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper remains more than the
predetermined level: Since the Toner Empty Detecting Lever is on the Toner, it does not make an up-and-down motion, keeping S106 deactuated. Hence, the copier does not determine that toner is empty. When the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper is less than the predetermined level: The Toner Empty Detecting Lever is moved up and down by the eccentric cam, which repeatedly actuates and deactuates S106. When S106 is turned on continuously more than 10 times, the copier determines that toner is empty in the Sub Hopper.
Rear Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever Eccentric Cam Magnet
Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106
Front
M-72
<Control> Toner Empty Detection Control The Sub Hopper toner empty detection sequence is carried out while Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 remains energized. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated. Master Board PWB-A A LOW Sub Hopper Toner Empty signal is input to pin 57 (APB1) of IC4A. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized to turn the Toner Bottle one turn, thus replenishing toner from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper. A toner-empty condition is detected at the timing at which M9 is next energized. The above operations are repeated and, if the Sub Hopper Toner Empty signal does not go LOW even after the Toner Bottle has been turned ten turns, the Toner Bottle is not turned again. The copier determines that there is a toner-empty condition in the Sub Hopper, lighting up the Add Toner Indicator on the control panel.
Control After Toner Empty Detection
The Front Door is swung down, Toner Bottle replaced, and the Front Door closed. Master Board PWB-A M8 is energized to turn continuously the Toner Bottle so that toner is supplied from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper. M9 is energized once and kept so for approx. 1.7 seconds for every three turns of the Toner Bottle. The Sub Hopper toner empty detection sequence is carried out a maximum eight times. As soon as the signal from S106 goes HIGH, M8 is deenergized to stop the Toner Bottle. The Add Toner Indicator on the control panel goes out.
M-73
ON Main Drive Motor M1 OFF 3 Times ON Main Hopper Toner Replenshing Motor M9 OFF ON Sub Hopper Toner Replenshing Motor M9 OFF Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 Add Toner Indicator. L H ON OFF
1136T35MCA
3 Times
1136C16M
M-74
Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 to turn the Toner Bottle one turn, thereby supplying toner from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper. <Mechanism> Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized. The Home Position Detecting Plate on the M8 shaft is turned and, at the same time, the Coupling is turned. Since the two pins on the Toner Bottle fit into the slots in the Coupling, the Coupling and Toner Bottle are turned together. When the indentation on the Toner Bottle moves past the protrusion on the Toner Bottle Holder, the Toner Bottle is vibrated to prevent some of the toner from remaining unconsumed in the Bottle. Since the Toner Supply Port in the Toner Bottle is aligned with the Toner Supply Hole in the Coupling, toner in the Toner Bottle drops down as the Supply Hole becomes located at the bottom.
Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 Toner Bottle
Toner Bottle
Toner Supply Port Toner Supply Hole Toner Bottle Holder Home Position Detecting Plate
Coupling
M-75
<Control> Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 ensures that the Toner Bottle is stopped so that its Toner Supply Port is located at the top. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated. Master Board PWB-A A LOW M8 ON signal is output from pin 51 (APA3) of IC4A. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 is unblocked. Master Board PWB-A A HIGH Non-Home Position signal is input to pin 56 (APB0) of IC4A. (This means that M8 has turned.) PC35 is blocked. Master Board PWB-A A LOW Home Position signal is input to pin 56 (APB0) of IC4A. The M8 ON signal from pin 51 (APA3) of IC4A goes from LOW to HIGH. M8 is deenergized.
1136C17M
M-76
Bottle Holder out 40 to the front. There is a flat spring installed on the Sub Hopper Holder, which causes the Toner Bottle Holder to click out of, and into, the locked position. The Holder pivots about the Toner Supply Port as it is swung out or in, which effectively prevents toner from spilling when the Holder is swung out or in. The Coupling is provided with a locking mechanism that prevents the Toner Bottle from turning when it is removed or installed. <When the Toner Bottle Holder is in Position> Since the flat spring fits into the front ^ notch of the Toner Bottle Holder, the Holder is locked in position. At this time, the bottom of the Coupling Lock Lever is pushed in by a part () of the Sub Hopper, keeping the Coupling free.
Flat Spring
Front
Rear
<When the Toner Bottle Holder is Swung Out> The Toner Bottle Holder pushes the flat spring down and moves over it until the flat spring then fits into the rear ^ notch. This locks the Toner Bottle Holder in position. At this time, the Coupling Lock Lever is free and the spring acts to lock the Coupling in position with the Lock Lever.
Rear
Flat Spring
M-77
9 10 11
12 13
14 20 19 18 17 16 15
Name
No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Name Lower Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Actuator 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 2nd Drawer Paper Separator Finger 2nd Drawer Paper Lifting Spring 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor Actuator 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC102 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll 2nd Drawer Paper Lifting Plate 2nd Drawer
1st Drawer Paper Lifting Plate 1st Drawer Paper Lifting Spring 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll 1st Drawer Paper Empty Sensor Actuator 1st Drawer Paper Empty Sensor PC101 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 Upper Vertical Transport Roller 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Actuator 1st Drawer Paper Separator Finger
M-78
Both for the 1st and 2nd Drawers, the Paper Take-Up Roll is semicircular
with the circular part of the Roll turned to the top at times other than take-up. This prevents paper from being caught by the Roll when the Drawer is slid out of the copier. Each drawer has two Paper Take-Up Rolls. The position of the rear Paper Take-Up Roll must be changed according to the size of the paper loaded in the drawer. (For details of Roll positions, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.") The Paper Take-Up Roll is grooved to keep good friction even under heavy loading. A small roll is built into one edge of the take-up Portion of the Roll. It reduces stress otherwise applied to the paper as the Paper Take-Up Roll hits against the paper. Drive for the Paper Take-Up Rolls comes from Main Drive Motor M1 via the timing belt and gear train. The Paper Take-Up Solenoid (1st Drawer: SL2; 2nd Drawer: SL3) and Spring Clutch control the turning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls.
Turning Direction
Roll
Spring
Ratchet
M-79
13-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control 13-3-1. Normal Control When the Paper Take-Up Solenoid signal from PWB-A (1st Drawer: pin 11 of PJ12AA; 2nd Drawer: pin 11 of PJ12AB) drops from 24 V to 0 V, the Paper Take-Up Solenoid (1st Drawer: SL2; 2nd Drawer: SL3) is energized to turn the Paper Take-Up Rolls one turn, taking up a sheet of paper from the Drawer. The Paper Take-Up Sensor (1st Drawer: PC56; 2nd Drawer: PC57) detects a sheet of paper which has been taken up from the Drawer. Here is the control timing chart. <Feeding 3 Sheets of Paper>
Main Drive Motor M1 Paper Transport Clutch CL1 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-up Sensor PC56/57 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-up Solenoid SL2/3 5msec. 5msec.
1136T36MCB
100msec.
100msec.
100msec.
1136C18M
M-80
13-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control To minimize occurrence of paper misfeed due to a slippery Paper Take-Up Roll, the Paper Take-Up Solenoid is energized a second time if a sheet of paper fails to reach the Paper Take-Up Sensor within 1,325 msec. after the Solenoid has first been energized. (This is called the paper take-up retry function.) A paper misfeed results if a sheet of paper does not reach the Paper Take-Up Sensor even after two paper take-up sequences. Here is the control timing chart.
Approx. 1,325msec. Approx. 1,250msec.
1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take/Up Sensor PC56/57 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take/Up Solenoid SL2/3 Upper/Lower Vertical Transport Roller
1136T37MCA
Approx. 100msec.
Approx. 100msec.
*2
*2: The copier determines that there is a paper misfeed if the Paper Take-Up Sensor is not activated after the lapse of approx. 1,250 msec. after the paper take-up retry motion.
M-81
13-3-3. Double Feed Control Even if the Paper Take-Up Rolls take up two sheets of paper at one time, the double feed control uses the second sheet of paper for the next copy cycle without causing a paper misfeed. It eliminates a paper misfeed that would otherwise result when two sheets of paper are taken up at once. If the second sheet of paper is stationary, keeping the Paper Take-Up Sensor (1st Drawer: PC56; 2nd Drawer: PC57) activated, when the trailing edge of the first sheet of paper moves past Transport Roller Sensor PC54, the copier determines that it is a double feed condition and provides double feed control. If, however, the second sheet of paper has reached the Vertical Transport Roller (paper feeding from the 1st Drawer: Upper; paper feeding from the 2nd Drawer: Lower), the double feed control is not provided since the paper is fed further into the copier by the Vertical Transport Roller. This could result in a paper misfeed or the second sheet of paper being fed through the copier with the first one. If double feed control is provided, it results in the paper take-up interval timer becoming longer. That means longer intervals between two successive paper take-up motions, resulting in a decreased cpm (productivity).
Paper Path (Leading Edge Position of 2nd Sheet of Paper) Transport Roller Sensor Detection Point Transport Roller Upper Vertical Transport Roller 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Detection Point Double Feed Control (Not Provided) (Provided) Paper Feeding from 1st Drawer
Lower Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Detection Point
1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up clutch SL2/3 1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56/57 Transport Roller Seneor PC54
M-82
13-4. Paper Drawer 13-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer Each of the two paper drawers (1st and 2nd Drawers) can hold up to 500 sheets of paper. It is a fixed paper size type and the following steps must be performed when changing the paper size. 1. Change the positions of Edge Guides I and II and the Trailing Edge Stop. 2. Change the type and positions of the Paper Lifting Springs under the Paper Lifting Plate. (1, 3) 3. Change the position of the Paper Take-Up Roll in the rear. (1) 4. Enter the new paper size using the Paper Size Input mode under the Tech. Rep. mode. (2)
1: For the detailed job steps, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT." 2: For the detailed job steps, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs." 3: The type and positions of the Paper Lifting Springs are changed to
ensure better paper separation and prevent the Paper Lifting Plate from flexing, thus eliminating the possibility of changing paper take-up pressure.
Edge Guide II Edge Guide I Paper Lifting Plate
M-83
13-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer The drawer is positioned when its ribs fit into the slots in the rail located on the paper take-up end of the copier. See the illustration below. The drawer is locked into position when the magnet mounted in the Magnet Mounting Bracket is attracted by the metal plate fitted to the copier frame. The drawer reference position is adjusted by moving the Magnet Mounting Bracket to the front or rear. For details, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT."
Paper Drawer
Rail on Copier
M-84
13-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection When the drawer is slid into the copier, the flap of the Magnet Mounting Bracket blocks the Drawer Set Sensor (1st Drawer: PC61; 2nd Drawer: PC62) mounted on the metal plate that attracts the magnet. Then, the copier determines that the drawer has been slid into position.
Magnet Mounting Bracket Drawer Set Sensor
Metal Plate
1136C19M
M-85
13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism Each drawer has Fingers that function to separate the top sheet of paper from the rest of the paper stack at paper take-up. The Fingers are fitted to the right front and rear corners of the drawer. When the Paper Take-Up Rolls start turning to take up the top sheet of paper, their turning force is directly transmitted to the top sheet of paper as it is in direct contact with the Paper Take-Up Rolls. That force overcomes the block of the Fingers, causing the top sheet of paper to ride over the Fingers and be fed out of the drawer into the copier. As to the second sheet of paper, the paper transport force obtained through friction with the top sheet of paper is weak and does not allow the second sheet of paper to ride over the block of the Fingers. Hence, the second sheet of paper remains stationary with the rest of the paper stack in the drawer. When there are two sheets of paper left in the drawer, the bottom sheet can be fed with the top one if the friction of the Paper Lifting Plate is weak. The Friction Plate affixed to the Paper Lifting Plate prevents this from happening.
Paper
Separator Finger
Friction Plate
M-86
13-6. Paper Empty Detection When the drawer runs out of paper, the Actuator for the Paper Empty Sensor drops into the cutout in the Paper Lifting Plate. This activates the Paper Empty Sensor and the copier will know that the drawer has run out of paper. The Paper Lifting Plate is raised at all times by the Paper Lifting Springs. To prevent the Actuator for the Paper Empty Sensor (1st Drawer: PC101; 2nd Drawer: PC102) from being caught by the paper stack when the drawer is slid out of the copier, therefore, it is tilted slightly. This, however, results in the operating stroke of the Actuator becoming small, which increases the possibility of the Actuator activating the Sensor by the flexing of a sheet of paper as it is taken up and fed in. To prevent this false detection of a paper-empty condition, the paper empty detection is enabled only when the Paper Take-Up Rolls are in the retracted position.
Actuator
1136C20M
M-87
13-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater Paper Dehumidifying Heater H2 is mounted on the copier base frame under the 2nd Drawer. It prevents the paper in the drawer from growing damp in highly humid weather. It works when the following conditions are met: The power cord is plugged in the power outlet. Power Switch S1 is in the OFF position. Paper Dehumidifying Switch S12 is in the ON position.
Paper Dehumidifying Heater H2
1136C21M
M-88
13-8. Manual Bypass Table 13-8-1. Construction The Manual Bypass Table is fitted to the Right Door of the copier, integrated into the copier. It is constructed as follows.
Right Cover Lever Right Door Cover Paper Empty Sensor Manual Bypass Table
Manual Bypass Table Paper Empty Sensor Actuator Paper Stopper Manual Bypass Separator Roll
M-89
13-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism The Paper Take-Up Rolls are normally in their raised (retracted) position so that they will not hamper proper loading of paper. When the Start Key is pressed, Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 is deenergized causing the Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls to press the paper stack downward and take up a sheet of paper. There are the Paper Stoppers provided that block the leading edge of the paper stack as it is loaded on the Table, preventing any portion of the leading edge of the paper from getting inside. These Stoppers are unlocked at paper take-up, allowing paper into the copier.
(In Standby) Lock Levers Lever Rack Gear Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4
Paper Stoppers
(At Take-Up)
M-90
13-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism Drive is transmitted to the Multi Bypass Table as follows. The gear mounted on the Lower Transport Roller shaft is turned by the drive from Main Drive Motor M1. ... (1) The drive is transmitted to the idle gear mounted to the copier frame. ... (2) When the Right Door is closed, the idle gear on the Multi Bypass Table meshes with gear (2) and drive is transmitted to the Multi Bypass Table. ... (3) Drive is transmitted to the gear on Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3. ... (4) The Manual Bypass Feed Roll mounted on the same shaft as CL3 is turned. Drive is then transmitted via the gear on the same shaft as the Manual Bypass Feed Roll and idle gear to the Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls. ... (5)
The gears in the following illustration are keyed to the description of the
operations given above.
M-91
13-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control The Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls are pressed against, and released from, the paper stack and the Manual Bypass Take-Up/Feed Rolls are turned by operating the clutches and solenoids with the signals from Master Board PWB-A. See the circuit diagram below. Operation timing is as follows.
TRON for 1st Sheet of Paper Main Drive Motor M1 Manual Feed Paper 500msec. Take-Up Solenoid SL4 Down Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 UP Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch SL3 Paper Transport Clutch SL1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 25msec.
500msec.
TRON for 2nd Sheet of Paper OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 25msec. OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
1136T39MCB
500msec.
500msec.
5msec.
25msec. 145msec.
25msec. 145msec.
1136C22M
M-92
13-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism The paper separating mechanism ensures that only the top sheet of paper is fed in by separating the second sheet of paper from the top one. This is accomplished by the Torque Limiter fitted to the Separator Roll shaft which stops the Separator Roll when there is a change in friction between the Feed and Separator Rolls. 1. At the Time of Double Feed: The top sheet of paper is fed into the copier by the Feed Roll. Since the coefficient of friction between the top and second sheets of paper is smaller than that between the second sheet of paper and the Separator Roll, the two sheets of paper slip and the second sheet of paper is not fed into the copier. The driving force of the Feed Roll is at this time neutralized by the two slipping sheets of paper and not transmitted to the Separator Roll which is stopped by its Torque Limiter. In other words, the force of the Torque Limiter is greater than the driving force of the Feed Roll as it is transmitted through the two sheets of paper.
Feed Roll
2. Normal Feeding: The friction coefficient on the top side of the paper is equivalent to that on the underside. Hence, the driving force of the Feed Roll is directly transmitted to the Separator Roll through the paper, causing the Separator Roll to be turned by the Feed Roll. In other words, the force of the Torque Limiter is smaller than the driving force of the Feed Roll as it is transmitted through the paper.
M-93
13-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection The Manual Bypass Table is equipped with Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor PC51 which detects a sheet of paper on the Multi Bypass Table. Since PC51 is used to determine that a paper stack is placed in position on the Manual Bypass Table, it is activated when the leading edge of the paper stack is pressed against the Paper Stoppers.
1136C23M
M-94
M-95
14-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism The Transport Roller (drive-end) is turned by Main Drive Motor M1 via a timing belt and gear train. Since the Transport Roller is coupled by way of an idle gear to the Vertical Transport Roller (drive-end), the Vertical Transport Roller is turned as the Transport Roller turns.
Transport Roller (driven-end) Paper Transport Clutch Gear
Idle Gear
Timing Belt
M-96
14-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control The Transport Roller and Vertical Transport Roller are turned when Paper Transport Clutch CL1 is energized by Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The output from Transport Roller Sensor PC54 is used for the control of paper take-up timings. CL1 is energized and deenergized at the following timings.
TRON Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Main Drive Motor M1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 5msec. Approx. 110msec. Approx. 110msec. Approx. 110msec. ON OFF
1136T40MCA
1136C24M
M-97
14-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position Right Upper Door Set Sensor PC40, fitted to the copier body, detects the Right Upper Door when closed. The Vertical Transport Rollers (drive-end) and Multi Bypass Table are mounted to the Right Upper Door. Right Upper Door Interlock Switch S22 is also installed just as with the Front Door. When the Right Upper Door is closed, the ribs on the door activate/actuate PC40/S22.
Right Upper Door Interlock Switch S22 Right Upper Door
Ribs
1136C25M
M-98
15 SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS
15-1. Construction The Upper Synchronizing Roller is a metal roller covered with a polyvinyl chloride tubing. It is secured to the front and rear frames of the copier. The Lower Synchronizing Roller, a rubber roller, is fitted to the Transport Assy. Pivoting about its rear end, the Lower Roller can be swung downward to facilitate clearing of paper misfeeds.
Guide Plates Lower Synchronizing Roller Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Upper Synchronizing Roller Lower Synchronizing Roller
Torsion Spring
M-99
15-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism The Upper Synchronizing Roller receives drive from Main Drive Motor M1 via a gear train and timing belt. The Upper Roller drives the lower one. The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 is energized.
Upper Synchronizing Roller Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 To Main Drive Motor M1
Timing Belt
3-Gear Unit
M-100
15-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 is energized upon reception of a signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The start of the Rollers is synchronized with the Registration signal (TRON). The TRON signal is output from SCP Board PWB-J at a given time after the Image leading Edge signal (BASE) has been output. The BASE signal is output when the Scanner reaches a given point in its scan motion. (For detailed timings of the TRON and BASE signals, see "8. OPTICAL SECTION.") The Synchronizing Rollers are stopped at a given time after the paper has moved past Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55. Here is the drive timing of the Synchronizing Rollers.
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Approx. 210msec.
1136T41MCA
TRON Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Main Drive Motor M1 Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2
Approx. 210msec.
Approx. 210msec.
1136C26M
M-101
15-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy During conditions of high humidity when the paper is damp, charges would tend to flow from the Image Transfer Corona through the paper and guide plates to the ground. This results in low image density on the copies. To prevent this from occurring, a plastic spacer is installed between the copier frame and each guide plate around the Synchronizing Rollers so that it remains insulated. Instead of using the plastic spacer, an electrodeposition coating has been applied to some of those guide plates. If, however, the resistance with the ground is made infinity, the guide plate would build up charges and a spark can occur with other guide plates, resulting in a malfunction. To prevent this, an 82-megohm resistor and a 1-kV varistor are connected to the guide plates. The guide plates are connected by flat springs as illustrated below.
Synchronizing Rollers C D Transport Rollers A B Varistor Resistor Upper Vertical Transport Rollers E Manual Bypass Feed/Separator Rolls
No.
Guide Plate Name Upper Pre-Synch Guide Plate Lower Pre-Synch Guide Plate Upper Transport Roller Guide Plate Lower Transport Roller Guide Plate Manual Bypass Guide Plate Vertical Transport Guide Plate Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate
Insulation Method Plastic Spacer Plastic Spacer None [Fitted to top of guide plate no. ] Plastic Spacer Electrodeposition Coating Plastic Spacer Fitted to plastic holder of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas
M-102
Flat Spring A B C D E
Connection Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate Between guide plates and Between guide plates and Between guide plates and
M-103
Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit Rail Image Transfer Corona Wire Cleaner
M-104
16-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation Image Transfer The Image Transfer Corona applies a DC negative corona emission to the underside of the paper thereby attracting the positively charged toner onto the surface of the paper to form a visible, developed image of the original. The Corona Unit is provided with a Corona Wire cleaning mechanism: the operator has only to pull out the lever on which the Cleaner is mounted from the front of the copier, which cleans the Wire. The mylar strips affixed to the housing of the Image Transfer Corona minimize current that flows to the housing, thereby reducing the amount of ozone that is produced. Paper Separation The Paper Separator Corona showers the underside of the paper with both positive and negative charges so that the paper can be easily separated from the PC Drum. In addition, two Paper Separator Fingers physically peel the paper off the surface of the PC Drum. (For details, see "PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers.") Note: The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit is provided with a Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate that determines the angle at which the paper comes into contact with the PC Drum and keeps an optimum distance between the paper and the PC Drum so that the image may be properly transferred onto the paper. Note: The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit and Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit Rail are insulated from the copier body. In addition, a 3.5-megohm resistor is connected to the unit rail. This improves the charge application efficiency from the Coronas Unit to the PC Drum and economizes on the output current from High Voltage Unit HV1.
M-105
16-3. Ozone Filter Ozone produced by the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas is absorbed by the Ozone Filter on the back of the copier. It is absorbed from the air being drawn out of the copier through the Duct under the Suction Deck by Suction Fan Motor M4. In this copier, this Ozone Filter absorbs ozone produced by not only the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas but also the PC Drum Charge Corona.
Duct
Ozone Flow
(Front of Copier)
To Ozone Filter
M-106
16-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas are turned ON and OFF by turning ON and OFF High Voltage Unit HV1. HV1 is turned ON and OFF by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. Here is the timing chart for the operation of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas.
Approx. 410msec. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Approx. 50msec. Image Transfer Corona Paper Exit Switch S53 ON OFF ON OFF
1136T42MCA
Main Drive Motor M1 Paper Separator Corona Image Erase Lamp LA2 MODE Signal Approx. 200msec.
1136C27M
M-107
17 CLEANING UNIT
17-1. Construction
AIDC Sensor Cleaning Blade PC Unit
Back of PC Unit
M-108
17-2. Cleaning Blade 17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism The Cleaning Blade is pressed tightly against the surface of the PC Drum and scrapes off any toner remaining on the surface after image transfer. The Blade Tension Spring, hooked onto the Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket, gives an appropriate tension to the Cleaning Blade as it is held against the surface of the PC Drum.
Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket Pivot Cleaning Blade Assy
17-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism The Cleaning Blade is moved to the front and rear while the PC Drum is turning. This is done to ensure that all residual toner is scraped cleanly off the surface of the PC Drum and prevent the Blade edge from deteriorating. The eccentric cam fitted to a shaft of the copier is turned, which pushes the Blade Moving Pin on the Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket. This results in the Cleaning Blade being moved to the front and rear.
To Main Drive Motor M1
M-109
17-3. Spent Toner Collection 17-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism The toner which has been scraped off the surface of the PC Drum by the Cleaning Blade is conveyed by the Toner Conveying Coil towards the rear of the copier and falls into the Toner Collecting Box at the back of the copier through the pipe. The Toner Antispill Mylar is affixed under the Cleaning Blade to receive toner, thus preventing any toner from falling down onto the surface of the copy paper or the paper path.
Toner Conveying Coil Toner Conveying Coil Drive Gear (Copier) Toner Conveying Coil Drive Gear (PC Unit)
M-110
17-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position Toner Collecting Box Set Sensor PC107 detects that the Toner Collecting Box is installed in position. When the optional Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is installed in the Cabinet, Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box Set Sensor PC31 on the Cabinet detects the Box in position. (Data is transferred between the Cabinet and copier through serial communication.) When the Toner Collecting Box is changed from the standard to large capacity type, Key 2 of DIP Switch S1 on Master Board PWB-A of the copier should be switched to ON. This enables the copier to detect the Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box. The combination in which S1-2, PC107, PC31 are ON or OFF determines how the copier regards the current situation. See below. NOTE: The Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is available for use in the USA, Canada and Europe only.
S1-2 PC107 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF PC31 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Copier: Regards that the standard Toner Collecting Box is placed in position. Regards that the standard Toner Collecting Box is placed in position. Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Regards that the Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is placed in position. Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place). Spent Toner Pipe PWB-A Toner Collecting Box
PC107 Actuator Change the pipe to the long type when the Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is used.
PC31
Actuator
M-111
1136C28MCA
M-112
17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers 17-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism After image transfer, an AC corona emission is applied to the underside of the paper by the Paper Separator Corona to neutralize the paper so that it can be easily separated from the PC Drum. To further ensure that the paper is positively separated from the PC Drum, there are two Paper Separator Fingers installed. They physically peel the paper off the surface of the PC Drum. (For details of AC corona emission, see "16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS.") The Paper Separator Fingers are swung up and down by Separator Solenoid SL1.
Separator Solenoid SL1
PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Shaft Swash Plate Cam Return Spring
PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Pivot Pawl (A) Finger Operating Lever
M-113
17-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism To prevent the Paper Separator Fingers from damaging the surface of the PC Drum, they are moved over a given distance to the front and rear so that they will contact wider areas of the surface of the PC Drum, thus preventing localized damage of the PC Drum surface. The Swash Cam mounted on the Pivot Pin of the Finger Operating Lever is moved through steps by means of the Ratchet and SL1, causing the Swash Cam to push the Finger Shaft. The lateral movement of the Paper Separator Fingers is 3.5 mm (which is equivalent to 60 times energization and deenergization operations of SL1).
Pawl (A) pushes the Swash Cam downward to turn it one notch.
M-114
17-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control The PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers are moved by energizing and deenergizing Separator Solenoid SL1 as commanded by a signal from Master Board PWB-A. The operation timing is as follows.
TRON
TRON ON OFF
Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Approx. 395msec. Approx. 265msec. Separator Solenoid SL1 Approx. 395msec. Approx. 265msec.
ON OFF
1136T43MCA
1136C29M
M-115
17-5. AIDC Sensor To provide image stabilization control, this copier has AIDC Sensor UN3 fitted to the Cleaning Unit of the PC Unit. The sensor is used to detect the toner density and background level on the PC Drum. The copier checks to see if the detection level of UN3 is up to the target level and corrects, as necessary, the PC Drum Charge Corona voltage (Vg) and Exposure Lamp level. For more details, see "IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM." Operation 1: The UN3s LED projects approx. 940-nm infrared light onto the surface of the PC Drum. 2: The UN3s phototransistor detects the amount of light reflected back. 3: The phototransistor outputs a voltage corresponding to the intensity of the light reflected back. Shown below is the relationship between the toner density on the PC Drum and Phototransistor output.
Toner Density High Low Output Low High
Note: The toner density is inversely proportional to the output, because the higher the toner density, the more the projected light is absorbed by toner.
M-116
17-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) Except USA, CANADA, EUROPE A Cleaning Bias Seal can be installed optionally. It minimizes damage to the PC Drum from acid paper.
ON OFF
Approx.150msec.ON
OFF
1136C30M
M-117
Filter
18-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control LA3 is turned ON and OFF by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. A faulty LA3 is detected by the signal input to IC4A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The ON/OFF timing of LA3 is as follows.
ON OFF Approx. 100msec. Image Erase Lamp LA2 MODE Signal Approx. 200msec. Main Erase Lamp LA3 Paper Exit Switch S53 Approx. 410msec. Approx. 340msec. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1136T45MCA
M-118
1136C31M
M-119
19 PAPER TRANSPORT
19-1. Construction
Suction Fan Ozone Filter
Suction Belts
19-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism Pulling the Transport Section Release Lever down swings the Transport Section down, pivoting at the rear of the copier. This facilitates clearing of misfeeds. 1. Pull down the Transport Section Release Lever. 2. The Transport Section Support Lever, coupled via gears to the Transport Section Release Lever, swings down toward the rear of the copier. 3. The front part of the Transport Section pivots at the rear of the copier to swing downward.
Spring
M-120
19-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism The Suction Belts are driven by Main Drive Motor M1 through a timing belt and gear train.
Suction Belt Suction Belt Drive Roller Suction Drive Gear
Timing Belt
M-121
19-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control Suction Fan Motor M4 turns at low speed in the standby state and at high speed during a copy cycle. The speed is switched by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. A faulty M4 is detected by the signal input to IC4A as shown in the circuit diagram below. M4 is energized at the following timing.
Main Drive Motor M1 Suction Fan Motor M4 Paper Exit Switch S53
Approx. 750msec.
Approx. 5,150msec.
1136C32M
M-122
20 FUSING UNIT
20-1. Construction and Drive Train
The Upper Fusing Roller and Lower Fusing Roller together apply heat and
pressure to the toner and paper to permanently fix the developed image to the paper. The Cleaning Roller is installed for the cleaning of the Fusing Rollers.
Upper Fusing Paper Separator Finger Cleaning Roller Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Fusing Thermoswitch TS1 Fusing Heater Lamp H1 Upper Fusing Roller Lower Fusing Roller Pressure Spring
Drive for the Upper Fusing Roller and Cleaning Roller is transmitted from
Main Drive Motor M1 to the Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear and Cleaning Roller Drive Gear via Timing Belt C and a gear train. The Lower Fusing Roller is driven by the Upper Fusing Roller in contact with it.
Cleaning Roller Upper Fusing Roller
M-123
20-2. Fusing Rollers <Upper Fusing Roller> Employed is a teflon-coated roller which features wear resistance and makes for improved fusing performance. It also repels the adherence of melted toner. Further, a conductive coating has been applied to the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller, thereby neutralizing any charges. <Lower Fusing Roller> An elastic silicone rubber is used for the Lower Fusing Roller, offering a wider area of contact between the two Fusing Rollers. Since the roller is cleaned only indirectly, the silicone rubber is covered with a teflon tubing. This contributes to preventing smear on the Roller.
Upper and Lower Fusing Rollers, the Pressure Springs are hooked onto the Pressure Holders at the front and rear ends of the Lower Fusing Roller. The other end of each of the Pressure Springs is hooked to the Pressure Lever, into which a Pressure Screw is installed. When the Pressure Screws are tightened, the Pressure Holders are raised. As a result, the Lower Fusing Roller is brought into tight contact with the Upper Fusing Roller.
Upper Fusing Roller Rear
Front Pressure Screw Lower Fusing Roller Pressure Lever Pressure Holder Pressure Spring
M-124
remove toner and paper dust from the Upper Fusing Roller.
Roller and toner and paper dust on the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller stick to the brush of the Cleaning Roller. It also supplies silicone oil to the surface of the Upper Fusing Roller, thereby helping the Roller repel the adherence of melted toner and preventing paper from being wound around it.
Cleaning Roller
The Cleaning Roller is a hollow aluminum pipe into which silicone oil has
been packed. The surface of the aluminum pipe has many holes. Paper is wrapped around this aluminum pipe to hold the silicone oil and is covered with an oil-impregnated brush.
Silicone Oil
Aluminum Pipe
Paper Brush
M-125
surface of the Upper Fusing Roller by a pressure spring. The fingers are laid out as illustrated below, as paper registration is to one side in this copier.
Upper Fusing Roller Rear Upper Fusing Paper Separator Finger
Front
x Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers The Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are flat springs to enhance
paper separating performance and ensure that the paper would not be wedged if a misfeed occurs. The Fusing Lower Guide/Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers Assy is moved down as the Exit Unit is swung down, facilitating clearing of misfeeds.
Fusing Lower Guide/Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers Assy Lower Fusing Paper Separator Finger
Front
M-126
20-6. Fusing Temperature Control <Overview> Fusing Front Thermistor TH1 and Fusing Rear Thermistor TH2 detect changes in the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller at its front and rear ends. The Thermistors input the corresponding analog voltages to pins 78 (TH1) and 77 (TH2) of IC1A on Master Board PWB-A so that PWB-A can control the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller. TH1 is usually used to provide 185C temperature control. TH2 is provided to monitor the temperature at the rear that could rise when paper of a small size is fed through the copier. Both thermistors are located where paper of a small size does not move past.
Fusing Front Thermistor TH1
To avoid a current surge when the copier is turned ON, Fusing Heater
Lamp H1 is turned ON with a time lag of 1 second after S1 has been turned ON. To protect H1 from being repeatedly turned ON and OFF, it is kept ON or OFF for a period of 1 second. While the copier is warming up, the Fusing Rollers are turned so that the Lower Fusing Roller receives heat. This ensures good fusing performance immediately after the warm-up.
Predrive Start
Start Key Copy Cycle Energy Saver ON Completed ON Energy Saver OFF
S1 ON
200 C
M-127
<Temperature Control When Small Size Paper is Fed Through> TH2 detects the surface temperature of the rear end of the Upper Fusing Roller. When detecting a temperature of 225C or more, TH2 comes into play to provide the temperature control. If TH1 detects a temperature of 165C or less, then TH1 is used, instead of TH2, to provide the temperature control. H1 is turned ON and OFF under different temperatures detected by TH1 and TH2 as detailed below.
Temperature Detected by Temperature Detected by TH1 TH2 Less than 185C 185C or more 165C or more Less than 165C Less than 225C Less than 225C 225C or more 225C or more H1 ON/OFF ON OFF OFF Turned OFF if currently ON Turned ON if currently OFF
Start Key
1136M159CA
The Table below shows the relationship between the analog voltage
applied to pins 77 and 78 (AN3 and 4) of IC1A on PWB-A and the Upper Fusing Roller surface temperature.
Temperature Input C Voltage to IC1A-77, 78 100 110 120 130 140 Approx. 3.21 Approx. 2.87 Approx. 2.53 Approx. 2.20 Approx. 1.89 Temperature Input C Voltage to IC1A-77, 78 150 160 170 180 190 Approx. 1.60 Approx. 1.35 Approx. 1.13 Approx. 0.94 Approx. 0.78 Temperature Input C Voltage to IC1A-77, 78 200 210 220 225 Approx. 0.65 Approx. 0.54 Approx. 0.46 Approx. 0.42
M-128
H1 has the following light distribution characteristic. That is, the intensity
at the rear of the Lamp is lower than the front end by about 30% to prevent the temperature of the rear end of the Upper Fusing Roller from increasing.
(%) 100 70 50
Rear End
Center
Front End
<Predrive> Predrive is performed at the following timing. TH1 detects the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller immediately before H1 is turned ON. If temperature is less than 165C If temperature is 165C or more
Predrive begins when the temperature detected by TH1 reaches 175C, provided that the Predrive Inhibit signal is LOW.
Predrive is completed in 30 seconds and the copier becomes ready to make copies when the temperature detected by TH1 reaches 185C. .
Predrive is completed in 15 seconds and the copier becomes ready to make copies when the temperature detected by TH1 reaches 185C. .
<Detection of Abnormally High Temperature> H1 is turned ON and OFF by the signal output from pin 16 (P51) of IC1A on PWB-A. It is turned ON by a LOW signal and OFF by a HIGH signal. When TH1 detects an abnormally high temperature, the output from pin 7 of IC20A on PWB-A goes from LOW to HIGH. The Self Holding signal goes LOW causing RY1C to turn OFF. This causes RY1 to turn OFF, which cuts off power to H1, turning it OFF.
M-129
1136C33M
M-130
21 EXIT UNIT
21-1. Construction
Left Door
Drive Gear Paper Exit Switch S53 Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 1st Paper Exit Roller Exit/Duplex Switching Plate
21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism Drive for the Exit Unit comes from the Fusing Unit by way of a gear train, turning the 1st and 2nd Paper Exit Rollers.
Driven Roll Driven Roll (in Fusing Unit) 2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear
M-131
21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate in the Exit Unit is operated to feed the paper into Duplex Unit AD-5 when the copier is in the 2-sided copying mode.
21-3-2. Switching Control The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate is swung up and down when SL5 is energized and deenergized by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The plate is operated at the following timing.
TRON Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Exit/Duplex Solenoid Clutch CL2 Approx. 1,350msec.
Approx. 2,770msec.
1136C34M
M-132
21-4. Paper Exit Detection 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism Paper Exit Switch S53 detects a sheet of paper that is being fed out of the copier. Instead of a photosensor, a reed switch is used for S53 for its heat-resistance. The switch must be located near the Fusing Unit which gets hot. When the paper moves the S53 actuator, the magnet fitted to the actuator is pulled away from the reed switch and the switch contacts open. This means that S53 is turned OFF.
( ON ) Magnet Paper Exit Switch S53 Driven Roll Reed Switch Contacts ( OFF ) Reed Switch 2nd Paper Exit Roller Magnet
Actuator
21-4-2. Exit Detection The S53 detection result is sent to Master Board PWB-A and the copier knows that a sheet of paper has been fed out of the copier. Here is the paper exit detection circuit.
1136C35M
M-133
21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41 fitted to the copier body detects the Left Upper Door when closed. The Exit Unit is fitted to the Left Upper Door. Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23 is also installed just as with the Front Door. When the Left Upper Door is closed, the rib on the Exit Unit pushes the Lever, which activates/actuates PC41/S23.
Left Upper Door Lever Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41
1136C36M
M-134
22 TOTAL COUNTER
22-1. Total Counter CT1 Total Counter CT1 is installed on the right side panel of the copier. It counts the number of sheets of paper that have been fed through the copier or the number of copy cycles that have been completed. Note: The count-up conditions can be set using the Tech. Rep. mode. For details, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs."
Front Door
M-135
22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position This copier is designed to detect a Total Counter placed in position. It ensures that the copier can keep track of its usage by eliminating the possibility of a copy cycle being run without the Total Counter being in position. As shown in the circuit diagram below, the copier inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle if it continuously detects a Total Counter out of position for a 400-msec. period. At this time, the copier keeps the Start Key blinking, warning the operator that the Total Counter is not in position. 22-3. CT1 Count-Up The signal from IC1A on Master Board PWB-A turns ON Transistors Q1A and Q13A under the following conditions, which results in CT1 counting up. See the circuit diagram below. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past Paper Exit Switch S53. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past the Sorter Exit Sensor of the Sorter if the copier is equipped with a Sorter. * When a copy is to be stored in the Duplex Unit in a 2-sided copying mode, the trailing edge of the copy moves past the Duplex Paper Entry Sensor of the Duplex Unit.
1136C37M
M-136
21 EXIT UNIT
21-1. Construction
Left Door
Drive Gear Paper Exit Switch S53 Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 1st Paper Exit Roller Exit/Duplex Switching Plate
21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism Drive for the Exit Unit comes from the Fusing Unit by way of a gear train, turning the 1st and 2nd Paper Exit Rollers.
Driven Roll Driven Roll (in Fusing Unit) 2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear
M-131
21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching 21-3-1. Switching Mechanism The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate in the Exit Unit is operated to feed the paper into Duplex Unit AD-5 when the copier is in the 2-sided copying mode.
21-3-2. Switching Control The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate is swung up and down when SL5 is energized and deenergized by the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below. The plate is operated at the following timing.
TRON Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 Exit/Duplex Solenoid Clutch CL2 Approx. 1,350msec.
Approx. 2,770msec.
1136C34M
M-132
21-4. Paper Exit Detection 21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism Paper Exit Switch S53 detects a sheet of paper that is being fed out of the copier. Instead of a photosensor, a reed switch is used for S53 for its heat-resistance. The switch must be located near the Fusing Unit which gets hot. When the paper moves the S53 actuator, the magnet fitted to the actuator is pulled away from the reed switch and the switch contacts open. This means that S53 is turned OFF.
( ON ) Magnet Paper Exit Switch S53 Driven Roll Reed Switch Contacts ( OFF ) Reed Switch 2nd Paper Exit Roller Magnet
Actuator
21-4-2. Exit Detection The S53 detection result is sent to Master Board PWB-A and the copier knows that a sheet of paper has been fed out of the copier. Here is the paper exit detection circuit.
1136C35M
M-133
21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41 fitted to the copier body detects the Left Upper Door when closed. The Exit Unit is fitted to the Left Upper Door. Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23 is also installed just as with the Front Door. When the Left Upper Door is closed, the rib on the Exit Unit pushes the Lever, which activates/actuates PC41/S23.
Left Upper Door Lever Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41
1136C36M
M-134
22 TOTAL COUNTER
22-1. Total Counter CT1 Total Counter CT1 is installed on the right side panel of the copier. It counts the number of sheets of paper that have been fed through the copier or the number of copy cycles that have been completed. Note: The count-up conditions can be set using the Tech. Rep. mode. For details, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs."
Front Door
M-135
22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position This copier is designed to detect a Total Counter placed in position. It ensures that the copier can keep track of its usage by eliminating the possibility of a copy cycle being run without the Total Counter being in position. As shown in the circuit diagram below, the copier inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle if it continuously detects a Total Counter out of position for a 400-msec. period. At this time, the copier keeps the Start Key blinking, warning the operator that the Total Counter is not in position. 22-3. CT1 Count-Up The signal from IC1A on Master Board PWB-A turns ON Transistors Q1A and Q13A under the following conditions, which results in CT1 counting up. See the circuit diagram below. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past Paper Exit Switch S53. * The trailing edge of the copy moves past the Sorter Exit Sensor of the Sorter if the copier is equipped with a Sorter. * When a copy is to be stored in the Duplex Unit in a 2-sided copying mode, the trailing edge of the copy moves past the Duplex Paper Entry Sensor of the Duplex Unit.
1136C37M
M-136
23 POWER SUPPLY
The Power supply Sequence from when the Power Cord is Plugged in and the Power ON/OFF Switch (S1) is turned ON is as below. 1. When Power Cord is Plugged in.
Power Cord: Plugged in. DC Power Supply Unit (PU1): ON DC24V: Output Power Supply Board (PWB-C) Main Relay (RY1): OFF AC Power is not supplied. RY2C: OFF RY3: OFF RY1C: OFF RY3C: OFF RY4C: OFF
1
Drum Dehumidifying Heater (H3): ON
1
Power Dehumidifying heater (H2): ON
2
DC5V is not Supplied
1: When Drum Dehumidifying Switch (S3) and Paper Dehumidifying Switch 2: When S1 on Power Supply Board (PWB-C) is set to "A", the DC5V REM
Signal which enters PU1 is L . Therefore DC5V is not supplied. (S12) are OFF, DC24V is not supplied to H2 and H3.
M-137
DC5V REM H : Output DC5V from PU1: Output DC5V: Supplied Master Board (PWB-A)
Power ON Signal L : Output RY1C: Normal Open RY2C: Normal Close RY3C: Normal Open RY4C: Normal Open RY1: Normal Close RY3: Normal Open
DC4.7V is Supplied
DC12V is supplied.
M-138
M-139
1136C0RM
M-140
24 MEMORY BACKUP
IC1 (RAM) of RAM Board PWB-R connected to Master Board PWB-A stores the setting/adjustment values set in the Tech. Rep. modes as well as the counter counts. Backup Battery BAT1 is mounted on PWB-R to prevent the contents of memory from being lost when the power cord is unplugged or PWB-R removed from the copier. BAT1 requires a voltage of 2 V or more to retain the contents of memory. Important As noted above, the RAM stores critical data. If PWB-R has been replaced with a new one, memory must first be cleared and then all settings be made again. It should also be noted that PWB-R should not be replaced at the same time when PWB-A is replaced.
1136C38M
M-141
EP2050
DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1 1. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS 1-1. Precautions for Disassembly/Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2. Instructions for Handring the PWBs with MOS ICs . . . . . . . . 1-3. Handring of the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4. Parts which must not be Touched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY 2-1. Doors, Covers, and Exterior Parts Identification and Removal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 2-2. Removal of PWBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 2-3. Paper Take-Up/Transport Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 (1) Removal of the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 (2) Removal of the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . D-11 (3) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 (4) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 (5) Cleaning of the Synchronizing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 (6) Replacement/Cleaning of Paper Dust Remover . . . . . . . . D-12 (7) Removal of the Suction Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 (8) Disassembly of the Suction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14 (9) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Cleaning of the Feed Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Cleaning of the Paper Separator Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 2-4. Optical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (1) Cleaning of the Original Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (2) Cleaning of the Scanner Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (3) Cleaning of the Scanner Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19 (4) Removal of the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20 (5) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20 (6) Removal of the Thermal Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21 (7) Cleaning of the 1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21 (8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th/5th Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22 (9) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23 (10) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24 (11) Cleaning of the 6th Mirror Protection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . D-25 (12) Cleaning of the Cooling Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25 2-5. PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 (1) Removal of the PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 (2) Disassembly of the PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 D-1 D-2 D-2 D-4
CONTENTS
(3) Replacement of the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (4) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (5) Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (6) Cleaning of Toner Antispill Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31 (7) Replacement of the Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32 (8) Replacement of the Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32 (9) Cleaning of the AIDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33 (10) Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers . . . . D-33 (11) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Seal . . . . . D-33 (12) Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34 (13) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34 (14) Cleaning of the Image Erase Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34 (15) Replacement of the Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35 (16) Replacement of the Toner Collecting Box . . . . . . . . . . . D-35 2-6. PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona Unit . . . . D-36 (1) Cleaning/Replacement of the Drum Charge Corona Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36 (2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh . . . D-37 (3) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing . . . . . D-37 (4) Cleaning/Replacement of the Image Transfer Corona Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37 (5) Cleaning/Replacement of the Paper Separator Corona Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38 (6) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39 (7) Cleaning of the Image Transfer Guide Plate. . . . . . . . . . . D-39 2-7. Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40 (1) Removal of the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40 (2) Disassembly of the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40 (3) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-43 (4) Cleaning of the Lower Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . D-44 (5) Cleaning of the Lower Guide Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44 (6) Cleaning of the Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44 (7) Cleaning of the Thermal Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44 (8) Replacement/Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller . . . . . . . . . D-45 (9) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller . . . . . D-45 (10) Replacement/Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller . . . . D-45 (11) Removal of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit. . . . . . . . . . . D-46
ii
CONTENTS
(12) Disassembly of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit . . . . . . . D-46 3 3 ADJUSTMENT 3-1. Jigs and Tools Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-49 3-2. Adjustment Requirement List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-50 3-3. Adjustments of Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-51 (1) Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21 . . . . . . . . D-52 3-4. Adjustment of Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (1) Adjustment of Paper Take-Up Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . D-53 (2) Adjustment of Developing Unit Timing Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (3) Adjustment of Fusing Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (4) Adjustment of PC Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53 (5) Adjustment of Scanner Drive Motor Timing Belt. . . . . . . . D-54 3-5. Electrical/Image Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-55 (1) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board . . . . . . . D-55 (2) Adjustment of the ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-56 (3) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-57 (4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode . . . . . . . D-58 (5) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Manual mode . . . . . D-59 (6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-61 (7) Adjustment of Feed Direction Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . D-63 (8) Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Table Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-65 (9) Adjustment of the 1st/2nd Drawer Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-66 (10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration . . . . . . . . D-67 Full size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-67 Enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-68 Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-69 (11) Adjustment of Single-Sided Book second page Leading Edge Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-71 (12) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-73 (13) Adjustment of the Image Trailing Edge Erase Width . . . D-75 (14) Adjustment of the Image Erase Lamp Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-77 3-6. Other Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-78 (1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-78
iii
CONTENTS
(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-79 (3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-80 (4) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs (1st and 2nd Drawers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-81 Replacement of Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-82 4 4 MISCELLANEOUS 4-1. Installation of Plug-in Counter (Option) Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-83
iv
1 SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
1-1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENTS
Observe the following precautions whenever servicing the copier.
Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier. The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly.
If it is absolutely necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts such as the Timing Belt and gears. Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the Interlock Switch with the covers left open or removed. Do not plug in or unplug print jacks on the Board or connect or disconnect the Board connectors while power is being supplied to the copier. Do not use flammable spray around the copier in operation. The Magnet Roller of the Imaging Unit generates strong magnetic force. Do not bring it near a cathode-ray tube or watch. A used lithium cell should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be discarded casually or left unattended at the users premises. Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sensors, as they can cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit containing these sensors is to be cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit. When handling the PWBs with MOS ICs, observe "1-2. Instructions for Handling the PWBs with MOS ICs." When handling the PC Drum, observe precautions given in "1-3. Handling of the PC Drum." Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items. Use the right screw in the right place at reassembly. Note that some are longer and some are thicker than others. A toothed washer is used with the screw that secures the ground wire to ensure positive conduction. Do not forget to insert this washer at reassembly. To reassemble the copier, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified. If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a board, be sure to use one of the rating marked on the blown fuse. Always note the rating marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used are subject to change without notice. Do not pull out the Toner Hopper while the Toner Bottle is turning, as a damaged Toner Replenishing Motor or locking mechanism could result. If the copier is to be run with the Front Door swung down, make sure that the Toner Hopper is in the locked position.
CAUTION: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
ADVARSEL!: Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.
D-1
D-2
If the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following procedure. 1. Place the PC Drum into one half its container.
2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of the PC Drum with a dry, dust-free cotton pad. a) Rotate the PC Drum so that the area of its surface on which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Blade is present is facing staright up. Wipe the surface in one continuous movement from the rear edge of the PC Drum to the front edge and off the surface of the PC Drum. b) Rotate the PC Drum sligh6tly and wipe the newly exposed surface area with a clean face of the dust-free cotton pad. Repeat this procedure until the entire surface of the PC Drum has been thoroughly cleaned. * Always use a clean face of the dry dust-free cotton pad until no toner is evident on the face of the pad after wiping. 3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol into a clean, unused dust-free cotton pad which is folded over into quarters. Now, wipe the surface of the PC Drum in one continuous movement from its rear edge to its front edge and off its surface one to two times. * Never move the pad back and forth.
4. Using the same face of the pad, repeat the procedure explained in the latter half of step 3 until the entire surface of the PC Drum is wiped. Always overlap the areas when wiping. Two complete turns of the PC Drum would be appropriate for cleaning.
NOTES
The Organic Photoconductor Drum is softer than CdS and Selenium Drums and is therefore susceptible to scratches. Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface. Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under interior illumination. If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more time.
D-3
1-4. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED (1) Red Painted Screws
Purpose of Application of Red Paint Red painted screws show that assembly or unit secured by which can only be adjusted or set at the factory and shall not be readjusted, set, or removed in the field. Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representative screw may be marked with red paint.
D-4
2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
2-1. Doors, Covers, and Exterior Parts: Identification and Removal Procedures
D-5
No. 1
Removal Procedure Open the Front Door; remove two Front Door Hinge Shafts; remove the Belt Mounting screw inside the Front Door. Open the Front Door; remove the Right Door; remove the Upper Left Cover; remove four screws that secure the Control Panel. Remove two screws that secure the Scale. Remove the Original Cover; remove one screw that secures the Rear Upper Cover (small). Remove the Original Cover and then one screw that secures the Left Hinge Cover. Remove the Original Cover; remove the Right and Left Hinge Covers; remove the Rear Upper Cover (small); remove the Right Cover; remove one screw that secures the Rear Upper Cover. Remove the Original Cover; remove one screw that secures the Right Hinge Cover. Remove the Right Door and then four screws that secure the Right Cover. Open the Right Door; remove the harness from the wiring saddle; unplug three connectors; remove two screws that secure the Right Door. Remove the Counter Cover by snapping it off. Slide out the 2nd Drawer and remove one screw that secures the Stopper at the rear left corner. Slide out the 1st Drawer and remove one screw that secures the Stopper at the rear left corner. Remove the Original Cover by pulling it up. Remove six screws that secure the Upper Left Cover. Remove the Upper Left Cover; open the Left Door; unplug two connectors; remove the E-ring from the Rear Hinge Shaft; remove two screws that secure the Front Hinge Shaft Mounting Plate; remove one screw that secures the belt inside the Right Door. Remove the Upper Left Cover and then four screws that secure the Middle Left Cover. Remove six screws that secure the Rear Cover.
2 3 4 5 6
Control Panel Original Width Scale Original Glass Rear Upper Cover (small) Left Hinge Cover
8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Right Door Counter Cover 2nd Drawer 1st Drawer Original Cover Upper Left Cover
16
Left Door
17 18
D-6
D-7
Symbol PWB-A PWB-B PWB-C PWB-D PWB-H PWB-I PWB-J PWB-R UN1 UN2
Name Master Board MSC Board Power Supply Board Noise Filter Board AE Sensor Board Tech. Rep. Setting Switch Board SCP Board RAM Board Control Panel Original Size Detecting Board AIDC Sensor ATDC Sensor DC Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit High Voltage Unit
Removal Procedure Remove the Rear Cover. Open the Front Door. Remove the B Board Protection Cover. Remove the Rear Cover and then the Master Board. Remove the Rear Cover, Master Board, Power Supply Unit Cover and then DC Supply Unit Cover. Remove the Original Width Scale and then the Original Glass. Open the Front Door. Remove the B Board Protection Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Rear Cover. Open the Front Door. Remove the Rear Cover. Open the Front Door. Remove the PC Unit, Charge Corona Unit, PC Drum and then the Paper Separator Guide Unit. Open the Front Door. Remove the PC Unit. Remove the Rear Cover, Master Board and then the Power Supply Unit Cover. Remove the Rear Cover, Master Board and then the ADF Connector Unit. Remove the Rear Cover, SCP Board Mounting Plate and then the High Voltage Unit Cover.
D-8
2-3. Paper Take-Up/Transport Sections (1) Removal of the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Right Door, Right Cover and Rear Cover. Slide out the 1st and 2nd Drawers. Open the Front Door. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down. Remove two screws and the PC Unit.
7. Remove three screws that secure the Upper Take-Up Unit at the front of the copier. 8. Remove one screw that secures the Supporting Plate.
9. Remove one screw and the plate spring. 10. Remove one screw that secures the Paper Take-Up Connector Unit.
11. Slide out the Guide Plate in the direction of the arrow.
D-9
12. Unplug the Bias Cord from connector CN on the High Voltage Unit. 13. Unplug connector CN (7P) on the High Voltage Unit.
14. Remove the High Voltage Unit mounting screw. 15. Unplug the Paper Take-Up Connector mounting screw.
16. Open the High Voltage Unit and Paper Take-Up Connector Unit in the direction of the arrow. 17. Unplug the connector CN (8P) on the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit. 18. Remove three screws that secure the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit at the rear of the copier.
19. Remove two screws and the Tension Lever. 20. Remove the C-clip and the Synchronizing Belt.
D-10
4. Unplug the connector CN (8P) on the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit. 5. Remove three screws that secure the Lower Take-Up Unit at the rear of the copier. 6. Remove one screw that secures the Right Rail Cover.
D-11
D-12
6. Remove three connectors (2P, 2P and 3P) from the Suction Unit.
7. Return the Transport Section Release Lever to its original position. 8. Remove the Transfer/Separator Corona by first pressing it down and then pulling it out.
D-13
1136D305AA
11. Holding up the Suction Unit, remove the pressure coil spring. 12. Remove the Suction Unit by sliding it to the right.
D-14
D-15
6. Remove the pressure coil spring. NOTE When reinstalling the pressure coil spring, place it so that the its close-coiled end faces the Separator Unit.
D-16
11. Remove two hex cap screws and the electromagnetic spring clutch.
NOTE When reinstalling the electromagnetic spring clutch, tighten the two hex cap screws while orienting the shaft of the Paper Take-Up Roll as shown in the figure on the left. The end of the clutch must be flush with or slightly (up to 1 mm) recessed compared with the end of the shaft of the Paper Take-Up roll. Press the shaft of the Paper Take-Up roll in the direction of the arrow and check that gap A is 1 mm or more.
0 1 mm A
1136D115AA
12. Snap off two C-clips to remove the Paper Take-Up Roll Assy.
D-17
14. Snap off one C-clip to remove the Paper Take-Up Roll.
D-18
D-19
2. Remove three screws from the Scanner. Holding the scanner at a point close to the Scanner Shaft, turn the Scanner counterclockwise to remove it.
3. Remove one screw and the Wire Guide. 4. Remove one screw and the Grounding Wire.
5. Unplug the Exposure Lamp connector CN. 6. Unplug the Thermal Fuse connector CN. 7. Remove the Scanner.
D-20
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the Lamp by gently wiping its surface in one direction. NOTE When reinstalling the Lamp, point the protruding navel of the Lamp toward the opening in the Lamp Reflector so that the protruding navel will not hit against the Lamp Reflector. After reinstalling the Lamp, go to p. D-58 and perform "(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode."
3. Remove two screws and the Aperture Blade Assy. 4. Remove one screw and the Thermal Fuse.
NOTE The Thermal Fuse must be in contact with the Lamp Reflector.
D-21
3. Gently dust off the surface of the Lens using a soft cloth.
4. Wipe clean the 4th and 5th Mirrors with a soft cloth.
D-22
B
1136D135AA
1. Hold the Cable Drive Gear in position with its Bead at the bottom.
2. Wind the longer length of Cable three and 1/4 turns clockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, working from the back to the front side. Then tape it.
1136D137AA
3. Wind the shorter length of Cable three and 1/2 turns counterclockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, working from the front to back side. Then tape it.
1136D138AA
4. Pass the longer length of Cable through the hole in the Light Blocking Plate. 5. Slide the Cable Drive Gear onto its shaft and insert a wrench into the hole (4 mm dia.) to position the Cable Drive Gear.
D-23
7. Secure the shorter length of Cable to the Cable Fixing Bracket, ensuring a distance of 2 mm or less for the dimension shown on the left. Then, secure the Bracket.
(2 mm or less)
1136D141AA
8. Wind the longer length of Cable around the Pulley B. 9. Hook the spring onto the longer length of Cable and then pull the spring to hook it onto the shorter length of Cable. 10. Remove the wrench and peel off the two pieces of tape used in steps 2 and 3.
1. Slide the Scanner toward the left side of the copier as far as it will go. 2. Fit one end of the Drive Cable into the fixed anchor. 3. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around (see figure left) Pulley A.
1136D144AA
D-24
4. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley B. 5. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around the Scanner Drive Gear clockwise, working from the bottom upward.
1136D145AA
6. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley C. 7. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley A (see figure). C A
1136D146AA
8. Using a flat head screwdriver, turn the spring anchor at the position shown left and fit the cable onto the it. NOTE Repeatedly slide the Scanner left and right, to verify smooth running of the Scanner Drive Cable.
D-25
3. Remove the Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Cover. 4. Unplug four connectors CNs (2P, 2P, 2P, 3P).
D-26
6. Remove one screw and the Hopper Lid. 7. Remove two screws and the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate. 8. Remove two screws and the Doctor Blade.
10. Remove two screws to unplug the 18P connector. 11. Remove three screws and the Mounting Plate Unit. 12. Remove the harness from the Edge Cover.
D-27
14. Remove two screws and the Comveyor Duct Assy. 15. Remove one C-clip and one screw to remove the Bushing of the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw. NOTE When reinstalling the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw, position it so that the arrow mark on the Bushing is at the top.
16. Remove one C-clip and one screw to remove the Bushing of the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw. 17. Remove one screw to remove the Bushing of the Developer Conveying Screw.
18. Remove the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw. 19. Remove the Developer Conveying Screw.
20. Remove one screw and the Coupling Gear. 21. Remove one screw and the Pressure Coil Spring Retaining Washer. 22. Remove the Bucket Bushing. NOTE When reinstalling the Washer, make sure that the back side of the washer faces the screw head.
23. Snap off the E-ring from the Ds Roll at the rear of the unit and then remove the Ds Roll.
D-28
24. Remove one screw and the Bias Terminal. 25. Remove one screw and the Pressure Coil Spring Retaining washer. 26. Remove one C-clip and the Bucket Bushing. NOTE When reinstalling the Washer, make sure that the back side of the washer faces the screw head.
28. Snap off the C-clip from the front Ds Roll and then remove the Roll.
30. Remove the connector CN (2P) from the Paper Separator Finger Drive Assy. 31. Remove the harness of the Paper Separator Finger Drive Assy from the clamp. 32. Remove the harness of the Paper Separator Finger Drive Assy.
D-29
33. Remove two screws and the bushing of the Tansfer Coil. 34. Snap off one C-clip to remove the Transfer Coil Gear.
NOTE When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade, be sure it is in contact with the bracket.
37. Remove the spring. 38. Remove one screw and the Bracket.
D-30
Using a brush, wisk dust off the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate.
D-31
NOTE When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade, be sure it is in contact with the bracket. See p. D-30. After replacing the Cleaning Blade, apply toner over the surface of the Cleaning Blade. Also apply the lubricant supplied with the Blade to two seals at the points shown (use a brush).
4. Fill the Unit with fresh Starter. NOTE After replacement, perform the following steps. 1. Cleaning of the Image Erase Lamp. 2. Reset the counter in the "Starter" display. See the "SERVICE MODE" in the "SWITCHES ON PWBs". 3. ATDC Adjustment, see p. D-56. 4. Exposure Adjustment in the Auto Mode, see p. D-58.
D-32
D-33
NOTE When reinstalling the Toner Antispill Plate and Toner Antispill Seal, press them in the direction of the arrows.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean the Filter.
D-34
D-35
2-6. PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona Unit (1) Cleaning/Replacement of the Drum Charge Corona Wire
1. Open the Front Door. 2. Clean the Drum Charge Corona Wire using the Corona Unit Cleaning Lever.
NOTE If the Drum Charge Corona Wire is seriously contaminated, dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Wire gently in one direction - from the hook end to the spring end.
1. Press the Mesh holder and remove the Charge Corona Grid Mesh. NOTE When reinstalling the Grid Mesh Holder, note the arrows shown on the left.
3. Remove the Charge Corona Wire, first at the spring end. 4. Replace the Charge Corona Wire with a new one.
D-36
NOTE Place the Grid Mesh on a flat surface and sweep the cloth along the mesh. Do not touch the cleaned Grid Mesh with bare hands.
NOTE If the Image Transfer Corona Wire is seriously contaminated, dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Wire gently in one direction - from the hook end to the spring end.
D-37
2. Remove the Corona Wire, first at the spring end. 3. Replace the Corona Wire with a new one.
2. Dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Paper Separator Corona Wire gently in one direction - from hook end to spring end.
1. Remove the two Holder Covers. 2. Remove the Corona Wire, first at the spring end. 3. Replace the Corona Wire with a new one.
D-38
D-39
2. Unplug the Heater Lamp Connector CN (1P) at the front of the copier. 3. Unclamp the Heater Lamp Wire. 4. Remove one screw and the Lamp Holder at the front of the copier.
5. Unplug the Heater Lamp Connector CN (1P) at the front of the copier. 6. Remove one screw and the Lamp Holder at the rear of the copier. 7. Unclamp the Heater Lamp Wire. 8. Remove the Heater Lamp.
D-40
10. Remove two screws and the Upper Fusing Guide Plate.
NOTE When reinstalling the Upper Fusing Guide Plate, be sure that both ends of the Plate make full contact with the Frame.
11. Remove the harness from the Harness Guide. 12. Unplug the harness connectors CNs (4P, 4P).
13. Remove two screws and the Harness Guide Plate. 14. Remove one screw and the Thermal Switch Wire.
D-41
NOTE When reinstalling the Temperature Detector Assy, be sure that both ends of the Assy make full contact with the frame.
NOTE When reinstalling the Lower Guide Plate, press the Plate in the direction of the arrows. Make sure that gap A shown in the figure is 0.8 mm. Also make sure that the rear end of the Lower Guide Plate is pressed against, not riding on, the rear bushing of the M7 jam removal shaft.
17. Remove two screws and the Lower Exit Guide Assy.
18. Loosen the screw that secures the spring bracket at the front of the copier and then unhook the spring at the top. Repeat the step for the spring at the rear of the copier. NOTE When reinstalling the springs, altemately tighten the bracket mounting screws untill the brackets completely contact the ends of the Lower Exit Guide Assy.
D-42
20. Remove the two Springs. 21. Remove the two E- rings from the Cleaning Roller and then the Roller.
D-43
Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil, wipe clean the Upper Paper Separator Fingers.
D-44
Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil, wipe clean the Upper Fusing Roller.
D-45
Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil, wipe clean the Lower Fusing Roller.
1136D304AA
7. Remove one E-ring from the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit Mounting Shaft. 8. Unclamp the harness at the places indicated by the arrows.
9. Remove one belt retaining screw. 10. Remove two screws and the Bracket. 11. Remove the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit.
D-46
3. Remove four screws and the Tray Holder. 4. Remove two screws and the ES Cleaner.
5. Remove the harness from three clamps. 6. Unplug the solenoid connector CN (2P).
1136D240AA
1136D241AA
D-47
11. Remove the harness from one clamp. 12. Remove one screw and the solenoid.
NOTE When reinstalling the solenoid, maintain gap A shown on the left at 4.0 mm to 4.5 mm.
1136D245AA
14. Remove two C-clips and the 2nd Paper Exit Roller.
D-48
3 ADJUSTMENT
3-1. JIGS AND TOOLS USED
xImportant When adjusting the copier, use the jigs shown below: The position of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage: jigs no. and The gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller: jigs no. and The position of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers: jigs no. and Jig no. , Pre-Drive Inhibit Switch Actuating Jig, is the same as the Interlock Switch Jig used for model EP3170. Jig no. , D.B. Adjusting jig, is the same as the one used for model EP1080.
Scanner/Carriage
Positioning Jig
Sleeve/Magnet Roller
Positioning Jig
PC Drum Paper
Separator Finger Positioning Jig
D-49
Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel Manual Bypass Table Drawer Positioning Plate Drawer Positioning Plate Control Panel Control Panel Control Panel
D-61 D-61 D-61 D-63 D-63 D-63 D-65 D-66 D-66 D-67 D-68 D-69
(1.000) 20 3.0 mm
Control Panel
D-71
D-50
Blue Yellow
Red
Red
NC (Normally-Closed) : Current flows between NC and COM when the actuator is open. NO (Normally-Open) : Current flows between NO and COM when the actuator is closed. COM (Common) : Common contact for NC and NO xRequirement Actuator The gap between the switch and actuator should be 0.1 mm to 0.5 mm when the actuator is closed.
NC NO
xOut-of-Adjustment (When the actuator is closed) If the gap between the switch and actuator is too big, current does not at times flow to NC or NO. . If there is no gap between the switch and actuator, the actuator is bent or the switch can be broken
D-51
3. Remove the B Board Protection Cover. (3 screws) 4. Loosen the two screws that secure the Front Door Interlock Switch. (2 screws)
5. Close the Front Door. 6. Gently move the switch toward the front side of the copier until the actuator is closed by the actuator stop on the Front Door. Tighten the two S21 mounting screws. Note that S21 is to be configured as a NO switch.
1136D011AA
D-52
1. Loosen the two screws that hold the tension lever. Press the tension lever in the direction of the arrow. When belt tension is correct, tighten the two screws.
350 100 g
350 100 g
300 100 g
350 100 g
D-53
3. Rotate the motor case counterclockwise and clockwise and then release the motor. Make sure that the coil spring smoothly returns the motor case and the motor sliding plate to the original position. Verify the spring operation by repeating the rotation.
NOTE Check that one end of the coil spring is in the correct hole in the plate as shown.
D-54
3-5. Electrical/Image Adjustments (1) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board
xImportant This adjustment must be made after memory has been cleared or the RAM Board or Original Size Detecting Board has been replaced; or the Original Size Detecting Sensor is replaced or a sensor is added. 1. Close the Original Cover with no paper on the Original Glass.
1136D017AA
2. Open the System Panel. 3. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.
1136P11DAA
Security Mode
Jam
Paper
Retry
Port
5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Function Mode Key (on the Service Card) and Multi-Copy Key 7 to set the copier into Test mode F7. 6. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts the adjustment. NOTE During the adjustment, the Start Key lights orange and returns to green upon completion of the adjustment. 7. When the Start Key lights green, press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.
Function
Maintenance
Consumables
Counter
Enter:
Function Mode
1136P02DCA
D-55
3. Open the System Panel. 4. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
5. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.
1136P11DAA
Security Mode
Jam
Paper
Retry
Port
6. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Function Mode Key (on the Service Card) and Multi-Copy Key 8 to set the copier into Test mode F8. 7. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts the adjustment. NOTE
1136P02DCA
Function
Maintenance
Consumables
Counter
Enter:
Function Mode
During the adjustment (for approx. 3 minutes), the Start Key lights orange and returns to green upon completion of the adjustment. 8. When the Start Key lights green, press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode. 9. Note the ATDC reference level shown on the message display and log the level onto the Factory Settings Label. Refer to Section TECH. REP. PROGRAM MODE in the SWITCHES ON PWBs manual.
D-56
2. Remove the Original Glass. 3. Turn the copy on the Copy Tray around as shown to reverse the leading and trailing edges and align it with the Aperture Blades.
4. Adjust to obtain the center image density for all areas on the copy. NOTE To make the image darker, move the Aperture Blade toward the Auxiliary Reflector. To make the image lighter, move the Aperture Blade away from the Auxiliary Reflector.
D-57
2. Open the System Panel. 3. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1 in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.
1136P11DAA
Security Mode
Jam
Paper
Retry
Port
5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Function Mode Key (on the Service Card) and Multi-Copy Key 5 to set the copier into Test mode F5. 6. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts the Auto Exposure adjustment. NOTE During the adjustment (for approx. 30 seconds), the Start Key lights orange and returns to green upon completion of the adjustment. 7. When the Start Key lights green, press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode. 8. Go to p. D-59.
Function
Maintenance
Consumables
Counter
Enter:
Function Mode
1136P02DCA
D-58
1136D300AA
xImportant
This adjustment should be follow Checking Auto Exposure Level and Adjustment of the Aperture
Blades. 1. Place the Kodak Gray Scale (KGS) lengthwise, face down and at the center on the Original Glass. Place a sheet of white (no image) A3 or 11" 17" paper over the KGS and then close the Original Cover. 2. Set the copier into the Manual Exposure mode. Using the Exposure Control keys, set the exposure level so that the center LED on the Exposure Level Indicator lights. Make 15 A3 or 11" 17" copies and check that the 15th copy meets the exposure requirement given above. If the requirement is not met, perform the following adjustment steps. 3. Open the System Panel. 4. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
5. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.
1136P11DAA
D-59
Security Mode
6. Press Multi-Copy key 1 and the Tech. Rep. Choice key (on the card).
Paper
Jam
Retry
Port
Function
Maintenance
Consumables
Counter
Enter:
1136P04DCA
7. Press the OK key (on the card) repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Exp. Lamp Manual Adjust". 8. Note the value shown below the message. Press the Clear key to clear the value. 9. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the value with respect to the noted value for optimum exposure level: Adjustment procedure To make the image darker: decrease the value. To make the image lighter: increase the value.
E x p . L amp Ma n u a l Ad j u s t : XX ( 4 4 5 6 )
1136P06DCA
10. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode. 11. Go to p. D-58, (4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode followed by (5) Checking Manual Exposure Level and Steps 1 and 2 of this adjustment.
D-60
1136D025AA
Adjustment mode
A-1
xImportant This adjustment should be made before the adjustments for Reference Position, Adjustments (8) and (9). 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make five full size copies on A3 paper. Compare the dimension of reference line A on the 5th copy with that on the test chart. If the dimension is outside the tolerance, adjust the magnification setting in the following procedure.
D-61
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the Adjustment Mode.
1136P11DAA
6. Press the OK key (supplementary panel) repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Full Size Position (A 1)". 7. Note the value shown under the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the value with respect to the noted value for the correct magnification. Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A (200 mm) is: 199 mm or less: increase the value. 201 mm or more: decrease the value.
Lens Fu l l S i ze Po s i t i on : (A 1 ) XX ( 4 3 5 8 )
1136P08DCA
9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode. 10. Make copies of the chart in enlargement and reduction modes and verify that dimension A on the copies is within tolerance. NOTE In the enlargement mode, only half of dimension A of the scale on chart GTC-001 can be measured; hence, the measurement of 200 1.5 mm in the table.
D-62
1136D028AA
Adjustment mode
A-3
xImportant This adjustment should be performed before (10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration.
1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make five full size copies on A3 paper. Compare the dimension of reference line A on the 5th copy with that on the test chart. If the copy of dimension A is outside the tolerance, adjust the magnification setting in the following procedure.
D-63
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the Adjustment Mode.
1136P11DAA
6. Press the OK key (supplementary panel) repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message " Feed Direction Mag. Ratio: (A 3)". 7. Note the value shown under the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the value with respect to the noted value for the correct magnification: Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A (300 mm) is: 298.5 mm or less: increase the value. 301.5 mm or more: decrease the value.
Feed D i r ec t i on Ma g . R a t i o : ( A 3 ) XX ( 4 6 5 4 )
1136P10DCA
9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode. 10. Make copies of the chart in the enlargement and reduction modes and verify that dimension A on the copies is within tolerance. NOTE In the enlargement mode, only half of dimension A of the scale on chart GTC-001 can be measured; hence, the measurement of 300 1.5 mm in the table.
D-64
1136D029AA
xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Feeding two sheets of A3 or 11" 17" paper through the Manual Bypass Table, make two full size copies. 3. Measure the width of lines A on the second copy.
1136D030AA
4. If the measured width is not 20 2.0 mm, loosen the three screws that hold the Manual Bypass Table and move the Table in the direction of the arrow: Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 18 mm or less: move the Table to the front. When the copy of dimension A is 22 mm or more: move the Table to the rear.
1136D031AA
NOTE When an ADF is mounted, it involves changing the Original Glass. This in turn, results in the position of the Original Length Scale being slightly shifted toward the rear. This is corrected by the Original Positioning Plate when the Original Cover is closed.
D-65
1136D029AA
xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Feeding two sheets of A3 or 11" 17" paper from the 1st Drawer, make two full size copies. 3. Measure the width of lines A on the second copy.
1136D030AA
4. If the measured width is not 20 2.0 mm, slide out the 1st Drawer. Loosen the two screws shown in the left figure and move the Tray Positioning Plate toward the front or rear. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust the reference position of the 2nd Drawer. Adjustment procedure
1136D032AA
When the copy of width A is 18 mm or less: move the Plate toward the rear. When the copy of width A is 22 mm or more: move the Plate toward the front.
D-66
This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (7) Adjustment of Feed
Direction Magnification. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in full size mode and check the second copy for leading edge registration. When the registration is within the tolerance, go to "Enlargement" of this adjustment. Otherwise, go to step 3. 3. Open the System Panel.
xImportant
1136D033AA
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.
1136P11DAA
D-67
6. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Position Full Size: (A 4)". 7. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value for the correct dimension of A on the copy:
Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 18.5 mm or less: decrease the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 21.5 mm or more: increase the setting. 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode.
Len s Po s i t i on Fu l l S i ze : (A XX ( 4 0 6 0 )
4 )
1136P13DCA
Enlargement xRequirement A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm) of the GTC-001 chart should have a width of 40 3.0 mm. Setting range: 40-60 Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.8 mm xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the adjustment for the leading edge in full size. 1. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in enlargement mode (2.000) and check the second copy for leading edge registration. When the registration is within the tolerance, go to "Reduction" of this adjustment. Otherwise, go to step 2.
D-68
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
3. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 4. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.
1136P11DAA
5. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Position Enlargement (A 11)". 6. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 7. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value for the correct dimension of A on the copy:
Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 37.0 mm or less: decrease the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 43.0 mm or more: increase the setting.
Len s Po s i t i on E n l a r g eme n t ( A 1 1 ) XX ( 4 0 6 0 )
1136P15DCA
Reduction xRequirement A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm) of the GTC-001 chart should have a width of 10 1.5 mm. Setting range: 40-60 Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.2 mm xImportant This adjustment should be made after completion of the leading edge adjustment in full size. 1. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in reduction mode (0.500) and check the second copy for leading edge registration. If the registration is outside the tolerance, go to step 2.
D-69
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
3. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 4. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.
1136P11DAA
5. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Lens Position Reduction: (A 5)". 6. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 7. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value for the correct dimension of A on the copy:
Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 8.5 mm or less: decrease the settings. When the copy of dimension A is 11.5 mm or more: increase the settings.
Len s Po s i t i on Re d u c t i o n : ( A XX ( 4 0 6 0 )
5 )
1136P17DCA
D-70
1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover.
2. Open the System Panel. 3. Press the Book Mode key once to select Book 1 (single-sided) mode. 4. In the full size mode (1.000), make two single copies on A4 crosswise or 11" 8-1/2" paper. Check the second page of the second copy for leading edge registration. If the registration error is outside the tolerance of 20 3.0 mm, go to step 5.
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
5. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 6. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.
1136P11DAA
7. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Book B-Scan Regist. : (A 6)". 8. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 9. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value, for the correct dimension A on the copy:
D-71
Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 17 mm or less: decrease the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 23 mm or more: increase the setting. 10. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.
B o o k B |S c a n Re g i s t . : (A XX ( 4 5 5 5 )
6 )
1136P19DCA
D-72
xImportant This adjustment should be made after the leading edge registration adjustments (Full size, Enlargement and Reduction, and Book). 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. In the full size mode (1.000), make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper. Check the erase width in dimension A on the second copy. If the erase width is outside 1.0-6.5 mm, go to step 3.
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.
1136P11DAA
D-73
6. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Leading Edge Erase: (A 12)". 7. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease the setting with respect to the noted value, for the correct erase width in dimension A on the copy:
Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 1.0 mm or less: increase the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 6.5 mm or more: decrease the setting. 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.
D-74
xImportant This adjustment should be made after the Image Leading Edge Erase Width adjustment. Before starting the adjustment, make sure that SCH-21 is set at "Edge Erase On". Refer to the Tech. Rep. Program mode in the SWITCHES ON PWBs manual. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. In the full size mode (1.000), make two single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper. Check the erase width in dimension A on the second copy. If the erase width is outside 0.5-5.5 mm, go to step 3.
1136D042AA
1 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 C
4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-Copy Key 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order. The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode. 5. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start key to enter the adjustment mode.
1136P11DAA
D-75
6. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panel shows the message "Trailing Edge Erase: (A 13)". 7. Note the value shown below the message and then press the Clear key to clear the current setting. 8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease setting with respect to the noted value for the correct erase width in dimension A on the copy:
Adjustment procedure When the copy of dimension A is 0.5 mm or less: increase the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 5.5 mm or more: decrease the setting. 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy mode.
T r a i l i ng Er ase : XX ( 4 2
Edge ( A13 ) 58 )
1136P23DCA
D-76
xImportant This adjustment must be made after the reference positions of the Manual Bypass Table and 1st and 2nd Drawers have been adjusted. 1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the Original Glass and align its rear left corner with the reference position marker on the Original Width Scale on the left side of the platen. Close the Original Cover. 2. Make five single copies on A3 or 11" 17" paper in the full size mode (1.000).
1136D044AA
3. Check the erase width in dimension A on the second copy. If the erase width is outside 0.5-3.0 mm, turn the Edge Width Adjuster screw in the direction shown below: Adjustment procedure When the erase width in dimension A is 0.5 mm or less: clockwise. When the erase width in dimension A is 3.0 mm or more: counterclockwise.
D-77
3-6. Other Adjustments (1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage
xRequirement With the Scanner positioned in place on the copier upper frame, there should be no gap between one end of the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig and the Scanner and between the other end of the jig and the Mirrors Carriage. The space between the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage = 83.5 mm xImportant This adjustment should be performed with the Scanner loosely attached to the Scanner Drive Cable by slightly loosening the screw on the Scanner Drive Cable Holding Bracket. 1. Align the rectangular hole in the upper copier frame with the U groove in the Scanner. Insert the Scanner Positioning jig.
2. Install the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig between the Scanner and the Mirrors Carriage.
83.5 mm
3. Press the Mirrors Carriage in the direction of the arrow. 4. Verify that both ends of the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig have no gap.
1136D048AA
D-78
(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller
xRequirement The gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller should be in the range of 0.33 to 0.40 mm. 1. Remove the PC Unit, PC Drum Charge Corona and PC Drum. 2. Remove the Developer Scattering Prevention Plate by first removing two mounting screws.
3. Using a brush, wipe the developer off the surface of the Sleeve Roller.
1136D050AA
5. Loosen the three screws securing the Doctor Blade. Insert the D.B. Adjusting jigs between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller. 6. Press down the Doctor Blade until it positively contacts the D.B. Adjusting jigs, then tighten the three screws to secure the Doctor Blade.
D-79
1136D053AA
2. Using a hexsocket wrench, turn the set screw on one Finger Holder to adjust the gap between the Finger and PC Drum as described below. Adjustment procedure With the solenoid deenergized, the tip of the Finger should be at a point between A and B. With the solenoid energized, the tip of the Finger should touch point C. A ....... 41.5 mm B ....... 40.5 mm C ....... 40.0 mm
1136D055AA
3. Verify that the other Paper Separator Finger operates in the same way. If not, perform step 2. NOTE If correct values cannot be obtained, loosen the two solenoid mounting screws and adjust the position of the solenoid. Then repeat step 2.
D-80
(4) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs (1st and 2nd Drawers)
xImportant When the size of the paper loaded in the 1st or 2nd Drawer has been changed, be sure to change the Springs. When changing the Springs, also change the position of the Springs and Paper Take-Up Roll of the Drawer. Each drawer uses two Springs and has two spare Springs stored in the underside of the drawer. For disassembly of the Paper Take-Up Roll Unit, refer to p. D-12. 1. Determine the correct Springs, spring position and Paper Take- Up Roll Unit position by referring to the table below. Example Paper size: A4 lengthwise or 8-1/2" 11" 1) Place one SP Silver spring in the drawer at ALL SP1. 1-9, SP2. 10-14. 2) Place the other SP Silver spring at SP1. 6-9, SP2. 10-14. 3) Place the Paper Take-Up Roll Unit at position No. 3.
ALL SP1. 6~9 SP1. 1~9 SP2. 12~14 SP1. 2~5 SP2. 10~11 SP2. 10~14
SP1. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 Edge Guide 7 8 9
SP Silver
4 4 3
10 FLS. 11 B5 12 13 A5 14 INV.
D-81
Replacement of Springs This procedure is for the 1st Drawer. The steps also apply to the 2nd drawer. 1. Pull out the 1st Drawer and remove the stopper screw and then the stopper. 2. Remove the Drawer.
3. Remove the Hinge Shaft from the front Paper Separator Finger and then the Finger.
5. Lift the hinged portion and then swing the Paper Lifting Plate in the direction of the arrow. Change the springs. Close the Plate.
D-82
4 MISCELLANEOUS
4-1. Installation of Plug-in Counter (Option) Mounting Bracket
1. Open the Right Cover. 2. Remove the harness from the Wire Saddle. 3. Unplug three CN connectors, 2P, 3P and 3P.
5. Remove the Counter Cover. 6. Remove the four screws from the Right Cover and then the cover.
7. Remove the PC Unit. 8. Remove the B Board Protection Cover by first removing two screws.
9. Connect the Plug-in Counter Connector. 10. Secure the Plug-in Counter Mounting Bracket with two screws.
D-83
MEMO
EP2050
SWITCHES ON PWBs, TECH. REP. MODE
CONTENTS
1 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs 1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 1-2. Precautions for Replacement/Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 2 FUNCTION OF SWITCHES AND VARIABLE RESISTORS ON PWBs 2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 3 Master Board (PWB-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2 Power Supply Board (PWB-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-3 Original Size Detecting Board (UN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-3 Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board (PWB-I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-4
TECH. REP. MODE 3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. Tech. Rep. Mode Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-6 Function Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-9 Tech. Rep. Choice Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-12 Paper Size Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-19 System Setting Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21 A. Changing the fixed zoom ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21 B. Setting the Plug-In Counter/D-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22 C. Setting the marketing area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-23 3-6. Counter Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-24 A. Paper Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-25 B. Jam Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-26 C. Feed Retry Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27 D. Trouble Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28 E. Maintenance Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-31 F. Port/Option Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-32 G. Consumables Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-33 H. Auto CPU Reset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-34 3-7. ROM Version Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-35 3-8. ADF Setting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-36 3-9. Security Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-38 3-10. I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-39 3-11. Level History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-49
CONTENTS
.4. . .ADJUST. MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-51 ...... ......
6 LIST OF SETTINGS TO BE MADE DUE TO PARTS . . . .REPLACEMENT .OR. MEMORY .CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S-69 ............. .. ........ .........
ii
S-1
LD2
LD1
VR1
TONER BOTTLE 2 1
ON OFF
PWB-A
S1
1136S003AA
1136S003AA
VR1: DC 4.7V Adjusting Variable Resistor (for factory setting) LD1: Power Voltage Check LED (DC 5V) LD2: Power Voltage Check LED (DC 24V) S1-2: Toner Collection Box Select Switch
Toner Collection Box S1A 80K (Supplied) ON 180K (Can be fitted into the Paper Feed Cabinet) q q
S-2
S1C
PWB-C
1136S004AA
S1C: When the DT-103 is fitted to the copier, this switch is used to maintain communication (DC
5V applied) when the Power Switch is turned OFF. S1C Position A Position B Description DC 5V is shut off when the Power is turned OFF. DC 5V is applied if the Power Switch is turned OFF.
J1
UN2
J2
1136S005AA
J1: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 has been installed, change the position of the jumper connector. J2: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensors CD2, FD3 have been installed, change the position of the jumper connector. Note: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor(s) has (have) been installed and the positions of the jumper connectors changed, the Function Mode "F7" must be executed. Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Yes J1 Position of jumper connector O
1136S006AA
CD2 FD3 No J1 O
1136S007AA
Yes J2 O
1136S006AA
No J2 O
1136S007AA
S-3
PJ2
S1 VR1
TP1
TP3
TP2
GND
TOTAL
MEMORY
1136S008AA
Function Used to clear data other than the Program Memory, Electronic Counter, Tech. Rep./User choice and zoom ratio data. Used to reset trouble related to Exposure Lamp malfunction (C04xx) and Fusing malfunction (C05xx). Used to adjust the contrast of the Message Display. Used to clear all data except the Electronic Counter and Level History (ATDC level). Ground used for memory clear and total clear.
Reset/Clear Method
Application
While connecting the Used when a two pins of PJ2, turn malfunction cannot the Power Switch ON. be corrected by turning the Power Switch ON/OFF.
S1 (TROUBLE)
Press the Trouble Reset Switch after correcting the area in trouble.
To reset other trouble or misfeeds, open and close the Front Door.
VR1 Contrast (CONTRAST) Adjusting Variable Resistor TP2 (MEMORY) Memory Clear Test Point
While connecting the Memory Clear Pin (TP2) and GND Pin (TP1), turn the Power Switch ON.
TP1 (GND)
S-4
List of Data Cleared by the Switch and Points Initialize Points PJ2 (INI) Trouble Reset Switch S1 (TROUBLE) Memory Clear Test Point TP2 (MEMORY)
Data Cleared
Trouble related to Exposure Lamp malfunction (C04xx) and Fusing malfunction (C05xx) Other trouble and misfeeds Incorrect operation/incorrect display Program memory Tech. Rep. choice Paper size System setting ADF setting Adjust mode User choice
q q q q q q q q q
S-5
Jam
Paper
Retry
Port
Function
Trouble
Maintenance
Consumables
Counter
Enter F O P
1136P04GCA
Tech.Rep. Card - 2
Card - 2 Card - 1
Tech. Rep. ID Code
Data Save
Level History
Initial Transmission
Data Load
DT Setting
Port
Panel Indication
Memory
RD Mode
I/O Check
1136P03GCA
S-6
(2) Select the desired mode from the items on the Tech. Rep. Card to set the corresponding Tech. Rep. Mode. 1) Place the Tech. Rep. Card (1 or 2) on the Supplementary Panel. 2) Enter the Tech. Rep. Card Number (1 or 2) with the corresponding Multi-Copy Key. 3) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
4) By selecting the desired mode from the items on the Tech. Rep. Card, the corresponding Tech. Rep. Mode is set. Note: When it is desired to change the Tech. Rep. Card Number after entering the number, press "CARD-1 CARD-2" or "CARD-2 CARD-1" on the Tech. Rep. Card to return to the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.
Press the Panel Reset Key. Remove the Tech. Rep. Card and Close the System Panel.
S-7
Types of Tech. Rep. Modes Tech. Rep. Card-1 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Mode Tech. Rep. Choice Mode Paper Size Input Mode System Input Mode Counter Mode ROM Version Mode ADF Setting Mode Security Mode Item Tech. Rep. Card-2 No. 1 2 RD Mode I/O Check Item
S-8
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Function". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
F _ x1.000
1136S146CA
6) Enter the Function Mode No. with the corresponding Multi-Copy Key. 7) Press the Start Key to start the function operation. 8) Press the Stop Key to terminate the function operation.
S-9
Types, Description and Operation Time of the Function Mode Function Mode F1 Paper passage test F2 Adjustment of High Voltage Unit HV1 output for Drum Charge/Image Transfer Coronas F3 Exposure Lamp ON confirmation Description This test can be initiated without having to wait for warm-up to complete. Press the Start Key to start the operation. The Scanner makes a scan motion according to the paper size and zoom ratio. The counters do not count up. Operation Time This Test continues until the Stop Key is pressed or the Drawer or port selected for use runs out of paper. This function runs for 30 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function runs for 30 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function runs for 60 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function continues until the adjustments end or the Stop Key is pressed.
By pressing the Start Key, the Scanner moves approx. 50 mm and the Exposure Lamp is lit.
F4 Adjustment of High Voltage Unit HV1 output for Paper Separator Corona
1. Press the Start Key. F5 Grid voltage 2. Grid voltage adjustment (with the Exposure adjustment/manual Lamp off, a solid black pattern is made on optimum exposure the PC Drum by the Image Erase Lamp). adjustment/automatic 3. With the Exposure Lamp on, a test scan is AE Sensor performed once. adjustment 4. Manual optimum exposure adjustment (the Exposure Lamp lights up and the half tone pattern on the back of the Original Scale is made on the PC Drum). 5. With the Exposure Lamp on, a test scan is performed once. 6. With the Exposure Lamp on, the Scanner moves approx. 50 mm from the Original Scale and comes to a stop. 7. Automatic AE Sensor adjustment (white level) 8. Automatic AE Sensor adjustment (half tone level) 9. The Exposure Lamp goes off and a test scan is performed once. F6 Image Erase Lamp ON/OFF confirmation (Edit position adjustment) F7 Automatic Original Size Detecting Sensor adjustment F8 Automatic ATDC Sensor adjustment After warming-up is complete, press the Start Key to switch the Image Erase Lamp ON/OFF to make a checkered pattern. (The Exposure Lamp is off.) With the Original Cover or ADF closed, press the Start Key to start the operation. The Developing Unit is energized to agitate the developer, allowing the Tech. Rep. to adjust the ATDC Sensor. Note: This function is only used to load or Note: change the starter. Automatic ATDC/AE Sensor adjustment Note: This function is only used to load or Note: change the starter.
This function continues until the adjustment ends. This function runs for about 3 minutes or until the Stop Key is pressed. This function runs for about 3 minutes 30 seconds or until the Stop Key is pressed.
FF F8+F5
S-10
Components Energized in the Function Mode O : Energized, Set Mode F1 Component Main Drive Motor Fan Motors (Suction, Original Glass Cooling) Synchronizing Rollers Drum Charge/Image Transfer Coronas Paper Separator Corona, Developing Bias Exposure Lamp Main Erase Lamp Image Erase Lamp Toner Replenishing Motors (Main, Sub) Paper Separator Finger Paper Feed Jam detection Malfunction detection Scan O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FF blank: Not energized
S-11
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Tech. Rep. Choice". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
6) By pressing the OK Key, select the Choice Mode in which you want to change or confirm the setting. 7) To change the setting, press the Cursor Key, which moves the cursor on the screen. 8) To enter the setting, press the Panel Reset Key or OK Key.
S-12
Description of Tech. Rep. Choice Modes Code SCH-00 SCH-01 SCH-02 SCH-04 SCH-05 Choice Mode Name Plug-In Counter Mode Paper Size Counter Mode Total Counter Mode Description Allows the counting mode (number of sheets or number of copy cycles) to be set for use of the Plug-In Counter. Allows the counting mode to be set on a paper size basis. Allows the counting mode to be set on a paper size/copy mode basis.
Maintenance Call Allows the ON/OFF setting of the maintenance call Reminder ON/OFF Mode reminder message shown on the Message Display. Copy Kit Counter Mode Allows the YES/NO setting of the Copy Kit Counter counting, and the setting of copying enable/disable at the end of counting.
SCH-15
Toner Empty Stop Mode Allows the setting of copying enable/disable on detection of a toner-empty condition. * When copying disable is set, the copier inhibits the initiation of a new copy cycle when the toner-to-carrier ratio becomes less than about 2.5% after a toner-empty condition has been detected. Automatic Paper Mode Leading Edge Erase Mode Trailing Edge Erase Mode Loop Length Adjustment Mode (Drawer Feeding) Loop Length Adjustment Mode (Manual Feeding) Exposure Lamp Voltage Adjustment Mode ATDC Detection Level Mode Allows the setting of the paper size selected on a priority basis in the Automatic Paper Selection Mode. Selects whether to erase the leading edge or not. Selects whether to erase the trailing edge or not. Adjusts the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Synchronizing Rollers. Adjusts the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Synchronizing Rollers. Fine-adjusts the Exposure Lamp voltage. Selects the level at which the ATDC Sensor functions to maintain a target toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer.
S-13
Choice Modes and Settings The screen displayed in each mode is shown below. Note that the cursor on the screen indicates the initial setting.
SCH-00
SCH-01
(Inch Area)
(Metric Area)
Size Counter : NO A3 A3 / B4
1136S122DA
SCH-02
Description 1 count per 1 copy cycle Multiple count-up according to paper size and copy mode Multiple count-up according to paper size and copy mode
* Counting methods of the total and size counters are according to the combination of the above
count modes. Copy Mode SCH-01 SCH-02
Total (Electronic/Mechanical) Size (Electronic) Two-Sided Total (Electronic) Two-Sided Size (Electronic) SCH-00 Plug-In (Mechanical) # of sheets # of copy cycles
1-Sided Sizes other than those set in SCH-01 Sizes set in SCH-01
2-Sided Sizes other than those set in SCH-01 Sizes set in SCH-01 Manual Feeding
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 0 0 0 1 1
1 1
2 1 0 0
2 2 1
2 0 1 0 2
2 2 1 1 2 1 2
4 2 1 1 4 4
4 0 4 4 4 4
1 0 0 0 1 1 4: 4 counts
1 1
2 2
2 2
2 2
0: No count
1: 1 count
2: 2 counts
S-14
Setting of Tech. Rep. Choice Mode (SCH-00, SCH-02) When the D-102 Is Installed on the Copier If the D-102 is fitted to the copier, Tech. Rep. Choice Modes SCH-00 and SCH-02 must be set as follows according to the count-up mode of the D-102. Tech. Rep. Choice Mode (Copier) Count-Up Mode (D-102) All Size Mode Size Mode I Size Mode II Full Color Mode I Mono Color Mode I Special Mode I 2-Sided Mode I 2-Sided Mode II Full Color Mode II Mono Color Mode II Special Mode II Plug-In Counter Mode SCH-00 # of sheets # of copy cycles O Total Counter Mode SCH-02 Mode 1 O Mode 2 O
O : Setting acceptable : Setting inhibited Note: If a setting is made for the Tech. Rep. Choice Mode where it is inhibited, an error could result in the count data of the D-102.
SCH-04
SCH-05
Description
Copy enabled at the end of counting. Copy disabled at the end of counting.
S-15
SCH-15
SCH-17
(Inch Area)
(Metric Area)
Description The copier automatically selects metric or inch paper for the original detected. The copier automatically selects metric paper for all originals detected. The copier automatically selects inch paper for all originals detected.
SCH-20
SCH-21
SCH-23
Note: 1. "" indicates that the loop length is decreased. 2. The loop length is increased or decreased by 2 mm.
S-16
SCH-24
Note: 1. "" indicates that the loop length is decreased. 2. The loop length is increased or decreased by 2 mm.
SCH-70
To change the code on the screen: 1. Press the Clear Key. 2. Enter the code number with the Multi-Copy Keys. Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Variable Voltage Value 6V 5V 4V 3V 2V 1V Standard value +1V +2V +3V +4V +5V +6V
Note: After making the above Exposure Lamp fine-adjustment, the "F5" mode must be executed.
S-17
SCH-90
ATDC Level -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
1136S169CA
Code 3 2 1
T/C Ratio 4.5% 5.0% 5.5% 6.0% 6.5% 7.0% 7.5% 8.0%
0
1 2 3 4
0: Initial setting
S-18
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
1136S001AA
1136S002AA
S-19
7) Press the Cursor Key to change the paper size displayed on the screen in the following sequence. To define the paper size, press the OK Key or the Panel Reset Key. Paper Size Values (mm) Length (F) F: A3 A4 A4 A5 B4 B5 B5 B6 11" 17" 11" 14" LEGAL LETTER LETTER 5-1/2" 8-1/2" FLS C: Width (C)
8) For free setting, enter the paper size values by the following procedure: a) Select the paper size display "F" C: ". b) Press the OK Key once. (The paper size entry is enabled.) c) Using the Cursor Key, select "F" (length) or "C" (width). d) Using the Clear Key, clear the paper size. e) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter a new paper size.
Note: Free setting is mainly used when it is impossible to judge whether or not standard size paper is loaded in the Drawer. By measuring the size of that paper and entering the values, the standard size paper nearest to those values is selected and shown on the Message Display.
S-20
S-21
B. Setting the Plug-In Counter/D-102 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.
S-22
C. Setting the marketing area 1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.
S-23
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select the desired counter from the following list: Types of Counters Items on Card Paper Jam Retry Trouble Maintenance Port Consumables Auto CPU Reset Counter Name Paper Counter Jam Counter Feed Retry Counter Trouble Counter Maintenance Counter Port Counter Consumables Counter Auto CPU Reset Counter Description Counts the number of sheets used on a paper size/type basis. Counts the number of jams per section. Counts the number of feed retries per port. Counts the number of malfunctions per trouble code. Used to show and set maintenance timing based on copy cycle. Counts the number of feed/passage/use times per port. Used to show and set the life of consumables based on copy cycle. Used to identify the presence/absence of automatic CPU reset for specific elements.
S-24
Press the OK Key to switch from one screen to another. To move the cursor on the screen, use the Cursor Key. To clear the count, use the Clear Key. To return the counter to the count it had before clearing, use the Interrupt Key. To input the counter setting, use the Multi-Copy Keys after pressing the Clear Key (for the To enter the counter setting, use the OK Key or Panel Reset Key.
A. Paper Counter Maintenance, Port and Consumables Counters only).
Paper Counter : A3 B4
1136S190CA
OK Key
Paper Type : S0 S1
1136S195CA
A4 B5 A5
1136S191CA
OK Key
S2 S3
1136S196CA
OK Key
B6 11"x17" 11"x14"
1136S192CA
Screen Display S0 S1 S2 S3
Description Standard paper Recycled paper Special paper (insertion) Reused paper (2-sided disabled paper)
OK Key
OK Key
FLS
1136S194CA
OK Key
* For such a paper size as A4 which can be loaded both lengthwise and crosswise, its count
represents the sum of both.
S-25
B. Jam Counter
ADF
1136S217CA
1 2 3 4 5
Europe Area
1136S001AA
1136S002AA
Screen Display MCBJ 1 MCBJ 2 Manual 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Description Jam occurrence ratio in the system (See Note) Jam occurrence ratio in the copier only (See Note) Number of jams that occurred at the Manual Feed Section Number of jams that occurred at the 1st Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 2nd Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 3rd Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 4th Drawer Number of jams that occurred at the 5th Drawer
Screen Display Dup Ent. Dup Exit Trans. PC Drum Exit Sorter ADF
Description Number of jams that occurred at the Duplex Unit Entry Number of jams that occurred at the Duplex Unit Exit Number of jams that occurred in the Transport section Number of jams that occurred in the PC Drum section Number of jams that occurred at the Exit section Number of jams that occurred in the Sorter Number of jams that occurred in the ADF
Note: MCBJ = Total Counter value Jam Counter value. When no jam has occurred, "------" is displayed.
S-26
OK Key
OK Key
Dup
1136S220CA
Description Number of feed retries in the 1st Drawer Number of feed retries in the 2nd Drawer Number of feed retries in the 3rd Drawer Number of feed retries in the 4th Drawer Number of feed retries in the 5th Drawer Number of feed retries in the Duplex Unit
S-27
D. Trouble Counter
OK Key
1136S197CA
S-28
Screen Display C000x C0040/1 C004A/b C004C/d C0070/1 C0072 C0200 C03xx C04xx C050x C051x C052x C060x C061x C062x C0650 C0660 C06Fx C090x
Description (Element/Cause) Main Drive Motor malfunction Suction Fan Motor malfunction Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor malfunction
Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor malfunction Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor malfunction Drum Charge Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona malfunction Master Board, Harness malfunction Exposure Lamp malfunction Warming-up malfunction Abnormally low fusing temperature Abnormally high fusing temperature Scanner Drive Section malfunction Lens Drive Section malfunction Mirror Drive Section malfunction Scanner Detecting Section malfunction Scanner Load Section malfunction Scanner Interface malfunction 3rd Drawer lift-up malfunction
S-29
Screen Display C095x C09906 C0998d C0E0x C0E2x C0F0x C0F10 C0F2x C0F3x C0F79 C0FE/Fx C0b0x C0b1x C0b3x C0b5x C0b6x C0b7x C0d00 C0d20 C0d5x
Description (Element/Cause) 4th Drawer lift-up malfunction Main Drawer malfunction (PF102) Shift Drawer malfunction (PF102) Main Erase malfunction Image Erase malfunction Original Size Detecting Board malfunction AE Board malfunction AIDC Sensor malfunction ATDC Sensor malfunction Paper Empty Sensor/Board malfunction (PF102) Original Size Detecting Sensor malfunction Drive Section malfunction (S-104/205, ST-101/206) Paper Clamp malfunction (ST-101/206) Paper Aligning Motor malfunction (ST-101/206) Stapler malfunction (ST-101/206) Bin movement malfunction (ST-104/205, ST-101/206) Punch malfunction (ST-206) Front/Rear Edge Guide operation malfunction (AD-5) Gate operation malfunction (AD-5) Drive Motor malfunction (AD-5)
S-30
E. Maintenance Counter
OK Key
OK Key
OK Key
OK Key Screen Display Count Setting Description 1 count per 1 copy Set the maintenance time based on copy cycle count. (Max. 6 digits)
* The above Maintenance Counters 1 to 5 can be used as desired. * When the count exceeds the settings, the following screen is shown on the Message Display to
indicate that an inspection time has come. (When Maintenance Call "YES" has been selected in the Maintenance Call Mode of the Tech. Rep. Choice Mode)
Maintenance 1
1136S071CA
Maintenance call display resetting method To reset the maintenance call display, clear the count after inspection (cleaning or replacement).
S-31
F. Port/Option Counter
Fuser
1136S189CA
Screen Display 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Manual ADF Ent. ADF Rev.
Description Number of sheets fed from the 1st Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 2nd Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 3rd Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 4th Drawer Number of sheets fed from the 5th Drawer Number of sheets fed from the Manual Feed Section Number of sheets that passed the ADF Entry Number of sheets that passed the ADF Turnover section
Description Number of paper take-up cycles in the Duplex Unit Number of sheets that passed through the Sorter Number of stapling cycles Number of punching cycles
PC Drum Number of PC Drum cycles Starter Fuser Number of developing cycles (copy cycles) Number of Fusing Roller cycles
S-32
G. Consumables Counter
Description
Set the number of copy cycles from after toner disposal to the next maintenance time.
* The maximum setting is 6 digits. * When the count exceeds the setting, the following screen is shown on the Message Display to
indicate that an inspection time has come.
Maintenance 2
1136S072CA
Description
Set the number of copy cycles from after copy kit replacement to the next maintenance time.
* The maximum setting is 6 digits. * The count of the copy kit is not made unless "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" has been selected in the Copy
Kit Counter Mode.
* When the count exceeds the setting, the following screen is shown on the Message Display to
indicate that an inspection time has come.
Maintenance 4
1136S073CA
Screen display resetting method To reset the screen display, clear the count after inspection (disposal or replacement).
S-33
If automatic CPU resets have occurred, the corresponding numerals are highlighted.
Example:
Indicates that automatic CPU resets occurred in the Elements corresponding to "2" and "5".
Clearing procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select the numeral corresponding to the occurrence of the automatic CPU reset. 2) Using the Clear Key, restore the highlighted numeral to normal. Screen Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 Element MSC, Control Panel (Copier) Master Board (Copier) SCP (Copier) Automatic Document Feeder (AF-3, AFR-7) Sorter (S-104/205, ST-101/206) Data Controller (D-102)
S-34
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "ROM Version". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
S-35
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "ADF Setting". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
S-36
Setting changing procedure 1) Using the OK Key, select the mode in which you want to change the setting. 2) Using the Clear Key, clear the current setting. 3) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a new setting. (See the following table.) 4) Using the OK Key or Panel Reset Key, enter the setting. Setting 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm Direction in which the document stop position moves away from the Original Scale 7 mm 6 mm 5 mm 4 mm 3 mm 2 mm 1 mm Initial value Direction in which the document stop position overlaps the Original Scale Description
S-37
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Security Mode". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
Input Admin. # :
1136S261CA
6) Press the Clear Key and input a 4-digit administrator number (0000 to 9999) using the Multi-Copy Keys. 7) Press the OK Key to enter the administrator number. 8) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
Note: After entering the administrator number, the screen changes depending on the mode selected. For more information, see the Administrator Mode in the Users Choice Mode.
S-38
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-2 face up. 4) Select any of the following modes: Mode Name Description Displays the data of the input/output ports of the PWBs in a machine standby state. Input port data: L, H; Output port data: 0, 1 Port The output port data can be changed by the Multi-Copy Keys. (0 1, 10) By changing the output port data, operation checks can be made on the drive parts. The input port data is changed by causing the sensor to be activated by paper. (Used to check the function of the sensor.) Paper Path Sensor The actual passage of paper causes the activated states (1 0) of the Paper Path Sensors to be displayed in order of paper passage. Self-diagnoses of the Master Board. Control Board If the result of self-diagnoses is not acceptable, trouble code "C03" is shown on the Message Display. Used to check the ON/OFF state of the Control Panel LEDs and Message Display indicators. Panel Indication Press any of the keys on the Control Panel to check whether the key pressed is detected or not. (Every time the key is pressed, the corresponding code number is displayed on the screen.) Checks the addresses of the RAM and ROM on the MSC Board to judge whether the RAM and ROM are normal or not.
Memory
S-39
Port Procedure 1) Select "Port". 2)The following screen appears on the Message Display.
IC Port Data : P0 P1
1136S244CA
IC Port Data : P0 P1
Press the OK Key twice.
1136S244CA
P2 P3 P4
Press the OK Key three times.
1136S245CA
P5 P6 P7
Press the OK Key three times.
1136S246CA
S-40
Actual Ports and Their Boards Corresponding to the Screen Display Numbers Copier Screen Display No. P P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 Ports Board
APA7 APA6 APA5 APA4 APA3 APA2 APA1 APA0 APB7 APB6 APB5 APB4 APB3 APB2 APB1 APB0 APC7 APC6 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1 APC0 BPA7 BPA6 BPA5 BPA4 BPA3 BPA2 BPA1 BPA0 BPB7 BPB6 BPB5 BPB4 BPB3 BPB2 BPB1 BPB0 BPC7 BPC6 BPC5 BPC4 BPC3 BPC2 BPC1 BPC0 Master Board IC4A
APA7 APA6 APA5 APA4 APA3 APA2 APA1 APA0 APB7 APB6 APB5 APB4 APB3 APB2 APB1 APB0 APC7 APC6 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1 APC0 BPA7 BPA6 BPA5 BPA4 BPA3 BPA2 BPA1 BPA0 BPB7 BPB6 BPB5 BPB4 BPB3 BPB2 BPB1 BPB0 BPC7 BPC6 BPC5 BPC4 BPC3 BPC2 BPC1 BPC0 Master Board IC5A
S-41
Cabinet Screen Display No. P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 PB3 PB2 PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1 Ports PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0 PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3 PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2 PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1 PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0 Board
1
PF-202 Control Board IC1A
PF3
PF2
PB3
PB2
PB3
PB2
PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1
PB0 PC0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0
PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3
PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2
PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1
PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0
PF3
PF2
PB3
PB2
S-42
Screen Display No. P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 P40 P41 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47 P48 P49 PB3 PB2 PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1
Ports PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0 PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3 PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2 PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1 PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0
PF3
PF2
PB3
PB2
PB3
PB2
PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1 PB1 PD1 PF1 PH1
PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0 PB0 PD0 PF0 PH0
PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3 PA3 PC3 PE3 PG3
PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2 PA2 PC2 PE2 PG2
PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1 PA1 PC1 PE1 PG1
PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0 PA0 PC0 PE0 PG0
PF3
PF2
PB3
PB2
PF3
PF2
S-43
Changing the Output Port Data 1) Output port data that may be changed is underlined. By moving this underline with the Cursor Key, define the data desired to be changed. Example:
P P P
2) By pressing the Multi-Copy Key "0" or "1", the data defined is changed (01, 10). (At this time, the drive part operates.) 3) The data changed is held for approx. 5 seconds and then returns to the original data. 4) By pressing the OK Key, move to the next "P".
Changing the Input Port Data 1) To change data corresponding to a sensor where data can be entered intentionally, activate the sensor using paper. 2) Change the changeable output port data which is located in the same column as the port of the sensor activated. 3) After the output port data has returned to the original data, the input port data of the sensor is changed. Example:
P P P
Note: When there is no output port in the same column or when the data of the output port in the same column cannot be changed, activate the sensor, then terminate the I/O Check Port Mode once, and select the Port Mode again. This changes the input port data of the sensor.
S-44
Paper Path Sensor 1) Select "Passage Sensor". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:
3) By passing paper, the activated state of each Paper Path Sensor changes (1 0) in order of paper passage. Note: To select the paper port, use the Paper Select Key.
Sensor Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E
Sensor Name 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor
Vertical Transport Sensor 3 Vertical Transport Sensor 4 Transport Roller Sensor Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor Paper Exit Switch Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor
S-45
Control Board 1) Select "Control Board". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:
3) Press the OK Key to self-diagnose Master Board and Cabinet Control Board faults. When the result of the self-diagnosis is acceptable: When the result of the self-diagnosis is unacceptable:
Panel Indication 1) Select "Panel Indication". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:
3) By pressing the OK Key, the LEDs on the Control Panel and the Indicators on the Message Display are all lit and then go off in sequence. 4) After all the LEDs and indications have gone off, the following screen appears on the Message Display:
5) By pressing any of the Keys on the Control Panel, the code number of the corresponding Key indicated on the following page is shown in the area marked on the Message Display. Note: Press the Panel Reset Key or OK Key to leave the Panel Indication Mode.
S-46
Code No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Key Name Multi-Copy Key "1" Multi-Copy Key "2" Multi-Copy Key "3" Multi-Copy Key "4" Multi-Copy Key "5" Multi-Copy Key "6" Multi-Copy Key "7" Multi-Copy Key "8" Multi-Copy Key "9" Multi-Copy Key "0" Clear Key Energy Saver Key Interrupt Key Panel Reset Key Access Mode Key Start Key Paper Select Key Auto Paper Mode Key Zoom Up Key Zoom Down Key
Code No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 35 36 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
Key Name Exposure Control Key (Lighter) Exposure Control Key (Darker) Auto Exposure Mode Key Enlargement Key Full Size Key Reduction Key OK Key Cursor Key DT Setting (Drum Dehumidify Key) Counter Clear (Book Mode Key) Port (File Margin Mode Key) Memory (Erase Mode Key) Initial Transmission (Auxiliary Toner Replenishing Key) Data Load (Insertion Mode Key) Level History (Cover Mode Key) Card-2Card-1 (Meter Count Key) Tech. Rep. ID Code (Manual Staple Key) Mixed Original Detection Mode Key Original Count Mode Key Memory Input Key
S-47
Memory 1) Select "Memory". 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:
3) By pressing the OK Key, the following screen appears on the Message Display:
4) 5) 6) 7)
"OK" or "NG" is shown in the area marked on the Message Display. "OK" indicates that the Power Switch should be turned OFF, then ON. "ROM NG" indicates that the ROM on the PWB-B should be changed. "RAM NG" indicates that the PWB-B should be changed.
S-48
3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-2 face up. 4) Select "Level History". 5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.
S-49
Level History Display Level Vg level (Read Only) ATDC level (Can reset) Description Data Value Display/Setting Range 550 to 850 (step: 30) 550 to 850 (step: 30) 2 to 254 (step: 2) 1.0 to 9.0 (step: 0.5) 49 to 71 (step: 1) Unit V V % V
Initial value Initial setting of grid voltage Correction Correction value of grid voltage value due to changes with time, etc. Setting Current value Initial value Initial setting of ATDC level Current ATDC level value (T/C ratio) Initial setting of Exposure Lamp voltage
Correction value of Lamp Correction voltage due to changes with value time (deterioration, etc.) Total (cumulative) time of toner replenishment Temperature control setting Current temperature control value
49 to 71 (step: 1)
Toner replenishing time (Read Only) Fuser temperature (Can reset) Setting Current value
0 to 1270 (step: 10) 175, 185, 195 160, 165 to 225 (step: 10)
min C C
Only the setting for the ATDC level and Fuser temperature can be entered.
The purpose and procedure for entry are given below: Purpose of entry ATDC level setting
When the RAM Board is changed or the P/C Unit used has been exchanged for
one from another machine: Enter the ATDC level reference value given on the Factory Setting Label found inside the front door.
When a fusing malfunction has occurred due to the environment or paper used:
Enter a value within the setting range (175, 185, 195).
Entry procedure 1) Call "ATDC Level" or "Fuser Temp." onto the screen. 2) Using the Clear Key, clear the current setting. 3) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a value within the data setting range. 4) Using the OK Key or Panel Reset Key, enter the value.
S-50
4 ADJUST MODE
Adjust mode setting procedure 1) Open the System Panel. 2) Press the Stop Key. 3) Press Multi-Copy Key "0". 4) Press the Stop Key. 5) Press Multi-Copy Key "1". 6) The following screen appears on the Message Display:
1136S143CA
1136S175CA
OK Key
OK Key
OK Key
OK Key
OK Key
OK Key
S-51
OK Key
OK Key
OK Key
S-52
NOTE When the RAM Board has been changed or memory cleared, the setting of each Adjust Mode must be returned to the factory setting indicated on the Factory Setting Label inside the Front Door.
Setting entry procedure 1) Press the Clear Key to clear the current setting. 2) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a new setting. 3) Press the OK Key or Panel Reset Key to enter the value. Types of Adjust Modes Code A-0 A-1 A-2 Mode Name Lens Focal Length Adjustment Lens Full Size Position Adjustment Mirror Full Size Position Adjustment Feeding Direction Magnification Ratio Adjustment Lens Position Full Size Registration Lens Position Reduction Registration Book B Scan Registration Description Corrects the focal length of the Lens. (For factory setting only) Adjusts the magnification ratio in the crosswise direction by finely adjusting the Lens home position. Corrects the conjugate length of the Mirror. (For factory setting only) Adjusts the magnification ratio in the feeding direction by finely adjusting the scan speed. Registers the leading edge for full size. Registers the leading edge for reduction. Registers the leading edge on scan B side for the Book Mode.
A-3
Lens Position Registers the leading edge for enlargement. Enlargement Registration Leading Edge Erase Adjustment Trailing Edge Erase Adjustment Corrects the width of erase on the leading edge of an image. Corrects the width of erase on the trailing edge of an image.
S-53
A-0
Setting 49 50 51 Description Short focal length adjustment Standard Long focal length adjustment O When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
A-1
Setting 43 ~ Correction: 0 steps ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~
58
A-2
Setting 43 ~ Correction: 0 steps ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~
58
S-54
A-3
Setting 46 ~ Correction: 16/1,000 Correction: 4/1,000 Correction: 0 Correction: +4/1,000 ~ O ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~ 54
A-4
Setting 40 ~ Description Correction: 10 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~ 60
S-55
A-5
Setting 40 ~ Description Correction: 10 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~ 60
A-6
Setting 45 ~ Correction: 5 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~ 55
S-56
A-11
Setting 40 ~ Description Correction: 10 pulses Correction: 1 pulse Correction: 0 pulses Correction: +1 pulse ~ O ~ When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~ 60
A-12
Setting 45 ~ Correction: 5 mm Correction: 1mm Correction: 0 mm Correction: +1 mm ~ O ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~ 55
S-57
A-13
Setting 42 ~ Correction: -8 mm ~ Description When RAM Board Changed/Memory Cleared
49 50 51 ~
58
S-58
2in1
Security Mode
Language Select
Book Mode
2in1
Separation
Custom Auto Exp. Level Counter Removal Manual Exp. Adjust Copy Mode Priority Finishing Priority Energy Saver Mode Auto Panel Reset
Intelligent Sort
OK
Setting procedure 1) Open the System Panel. 2) Place the Users Choice Card onto the Supplementary Panel. 3) Hold down the Panel Reset Key for about 3 seconds. 4) The following screen appears on the Message Display:
5) By selecting the mode you want to set from among the items on the Users Choice Card, the corresponding Users Choice Mode is accessed. 6) To change the setting, press the Cursor Key, which moves the cursor on the screen. 7) To enter the setting, press the OK Key or Panel Reset Key. Resetting method Press the Panel Reset Key. Remove the Users Choice Card and close the System Panel.
S-59
Types of Users Choice Modes Mode Language Select Mixed Orig. Detect Original Thickness Copy Mode Priority Description Used to select the language shown on the Message Display. Used to set whether originals of assorted sizes can be used or not when the Automatic Document Feeder is used. Used to set whether lightweight originals can be used or not when the Automatic Document Feeder is used. Used to set the priority mode selected automatically (Auto Paper Select/Auto Magnification Select/Manual) when the Power Switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset Key is pressed. Used to set the paper port selected automatically for the Auto Paper Select or Manual Mode. Used to set the priority exposure mode (Manual/Auto) selected when the Power Switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset Key is pressed. *The exposure level can also be set for manual exposure. Used to set the priority finishing mode (Non Sort/Sort/Group/Staple) when the Power Switch is turned ON with the copier equipped with the Sorter. Used to set the priority exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode when the copier has been set so that the Auto Exposure mode is selected in the initial mode.
Manual Expo. Adjust Used to set the priority exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode when the copier has been set so that the Manual Exposure mode is selected in the initial mode. Counter Removal Intelligent Sort Used to set whether the Control Panel is to be reset or not when the Plug-In Counter is removed. Used to set whether switching to Sort or Non-Sort is automatically made according to the number of originals/copy cycles when the copier is equipped with a Sorter and Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder. Used to set whether or not the copier is automatically placed in the Energy Saving Mode a given length of time after a copy cycle has ended. *When YES has been selected, the time may be entered. Used to set whether or not the Control Panel is automatically initialized a given length of time after a copy cycle has ended. *When YES has been selected, the time may be entered. Used to set whether or not the copier is automatically placed in the Drum Dehumidify Mode after the copier has completed warming up. Used to designate special types of paper loaded in each Drawer for the Automatic Paper Size Mode and automatic paper source switching function. Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called up when the 2-in-1 mode is selected. Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called up when the Book mode is selected. Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called up when the 2-in-1 Separation mode is selected. Used to enter the User Help Code, send the Code to the center, set whether Copy Track is performed or not, set the maximum limit to the number of copy cycles set with the Multi-Copy Keys, register/change the Access No., and clear the Account Counter.
Drum Dehumidify Special Paper Custom 2-in-1 Custom Book Mode Custom 2-in-1 Separation Administrator Mode
S-60
Settings in Users Choice Modes The following screen is displayed in each Mode. Note that the Cursor on the screen indicates the initial setting. Language Select USA, Canada Area Europe Area
Paper Pr. 3 4 1 5 2
1136S105CA
Europe Area
1 2 3 4 5
1 2
1136S001AA 1136S001AA
1136S002AA 1136S002AA
* The Drawer number flashes to indicate that the corresponding Drawer has been selected
for the Paper Priority Mode.
* Initial setting: 1
S-61
Exposure Priority
* When automatic exposure is selected, the manual copy exposure level can be set.
(Initial setting: EXP 5 (center)) 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "AUTO". 2) Using either of the Exposure Control Keys, select the exposure level. 3) Enter that level with the OK Key. Finishing Priority
+12 +8 +12 +9
+12 +10 +7
S-62
Counter Removal
Condition The copy cycle is initiated using a single original in the Sort Mode. The copy cycle is initiated to make two or more copies using two or more originals in the Non-Sort Mode.
Operation The copier switches from Sort to Non-Sort. The copier remains in the Sort Mode. The copier switches from Non-Sort to Sort. The copier remains in the Non-Sort Mode.
* When "YES" has been selected, enter the time required to start the Energy Saver Mode
using the Multi-Copy Keys (1 to 10 minutes). Auto Panel Reset
* When "YES" has been selected, enter the time required to start the automatic panel reset
function using the Multi-Copy Keys (1, 2, 3 or 5 minutes). Drum Dehumidify
S-63
Special Paper
Setting procedure 1) Using the OK Key, select the Drawer. (The corresponding number flashes.) 2) Using the Cursor Key, select the paper type in accordance with the following table:
Europe Area
2 3 4 5
1136S001AA 1136S001AA
1136S002AA 1136S002AA
Screen Display S0 S1 S2 S3
Description Standard paper (no special paper setting) Recycled paper Special paper Reused paper (2-sided copying disabled)
After making the special paper setting, press the Paper Select Key to call the following
screen to the Message Display: Example: When S1 has been set for the 2nd Drawer, S2 for the 3rd Drawer, and S3 for the 4th Drawer
A4 B4 A5
S1 S2
B5 A4 Manual
1136S128CA
If 2-sided copying has been set, the "S3" Drawer cannot be selected. If the "S3" Drawer has been set, 2-sided copying cannot be selected.
S-64
Setting method Erase, Margin 1. Use the Cursor Key to select the desired item. 2. Press the Clear Key to clear the current value. 3. Press the Multi-Copy Keys to input a new value in accordance with the following table. 4. Press the OK Key to enter that value. Note: Only 1/2" or 10 mm is available for Erase and Margin.
Zoom ratio Use the Reduction, Full Size or Enlargement Keys to select.
Paper Use the Paper Select Key or Auto Paper Mode Key to select.
Screen Display
Erase
NO
1136S011AA
1136S012AA
1136S013AA
1136S014AA
Margin
NO
1136S015AA
1136S016AA
S-65
Custom 2 in 1
1136S121CA
1136S133EA
Inch Area
Metric Area
1136S134EA
Enter Admin. #:
1136S135CA
Setting procedure 1) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter the Administrator Number (identification number.) registered in the Security Mode of the Tech. Rep. Mode. 2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:
3) Use the Cursor Key to select either item and press the OK Key to change the screen as shown below: When "User Help" has been selected "User Help" indicates that when the copier is fitted with the DT-103, a code (3 digits) for a request to replenish toner, paper, etc. can be sent to the center. Note that when no code has been entered, only the state of the machine is sent.
1136S137CA
Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired number. (The number selected flashes.) 2) Press the Clear Key to clear the current code and use the Multi-Copy Keys to enter a 3-digit code.
S-66
When "Copy Track" has been selected Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "YES" or "NO". 2) Press the OK Key to move to the setting of the next option.
1136S138CA
"NO" selected
1136S139CA
"Max. Copy Sets" indicates the maximum number of copy cycles that can be entered using the Multi-Copy Keys. Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "YES". 2) Press the Clear Key to clear the number of copy cycles and use the Multi-Copy Keys to input the maximum number of copy cycles. 3) Press the OK Key to enter the value and switch to either of the following screens:
"Copy Track Data" is used to register and change the identification number and clear the count on an account basis and is shown when "Copy Track" YES has been selected. Procedure 1) Using the Cursor Key, select "Copy Track Data". 2) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:
1136S140CA
3) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired item. By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:
S-67
When "Register Access #" has been selected "Register Access #" allows the access number (identification number) to be registered or changed on an account basis.
1136S141CA
Procedure 1) Using the OK Key, select the desired account number (1 to 26). 2) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input the "Access #" (4 digits: 0001~9999). 3) Press the OK Key to enter the account access number and switch the screen to the next account.
When "Account Counter" has been selected "Account Counter" allows the count of the Size/Total Counter to be displayed and cleared on an account basis.
1136S142CA
S-68
Settings To Be Made Due to Parts Replacement or Memory Clearing Users Choice input Tech. Rep. Choice input Adjust input Level History input Paper Size input Marketing Area setting ADF Setting F5 Mode F7 Mode F8 Mode FF Mode Memory Clear Initialize "PC Drum" in the Port/Option Counter cleared "Starter" in the Port/Option Counter cleared Setting of S1A on PWB-A
PC Drum
Starter
AIDC Sensor
q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q
q q q
q q q q q q q
S-69
EP2050
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
: Except the U.S.A. and Canada 1 1. INTRODUCTION 1-1. General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1 1-2. How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1 1-3. Reading the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1 2 2. PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE 1. Paper Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-8 2. Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timings . . . . . . . . . . . T-11 3. Misfeed Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-13 3-1. Copier Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-13 3-2. Transport/Separator Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-19 3-3. Multi Bypass Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-24 3-4. Fusing/Exit Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-28 3-5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . T-30 3-6. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . T-34 3-7. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-37 3-8. Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-45 3 3 MALFUNCTIONS 1. Detection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-49 2. Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-64 2-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor M1s Failure to Turn C0010: Main Drive Motor M1 Turning at Abnormal C0010: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-64 2-2. C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4s Failure to Turn C004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5s Failure to Turn C004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning at C004b: Abnormal Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-66 2-3. C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8s Failure to C0070:Turn C0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning at C0071: Abnormal Timing C0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9s Failure to C0070:Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-70
CONTENTS
2-4. C0200: PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer/Paper Separator C0200:Coronas Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-72 2-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1s Failure to Turn ON C0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at Abnormal C0410: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-74 2-6. C0500: Warming-up Failure C0510: Abnormally Low Fusing Temperature C0520: Abnormally High Fusing Temperature C0522: Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Malfunction . . T-76 2-7. C0600: Scanner Motor M2 Malfunction C0601: SCP Board PWB-J Malfunction C0650: Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 Malfunction C0660: Scanner Load Failure C06F0 to C06F7: SHOME, BASE, TRON, and SCEND Signal C06F0 to C06F7: Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-79 2-8. C0610: Lens Motion Failure C0620: 4th/5th Mirrors Motion Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-81 2-9. C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA3s Failure to Turn ON C0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA3 turning ON at Abnormal C0E01: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-83 2-10. C0E20: Image Erase Lamp LA2s Failure to Turn ON . . . . T-85 2-11. C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Malfunction C0FE1 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor C0FE1 to C0FFF: Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-86 2-12. C0F10: AE Sensor Board PWB-H Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . T-88 2-13. C0F20: AIDC Sensor UN3 Variation Correction Failure C0F21: AIDC Sensor UN3 Contamination Correction Failure C0F22: AIDC Sensor UN3 V G Correction Failure C0F23: AIDC Sensor UN3 Exposure Correction Failure . . T-89 2-14. C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure C0F31: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-90 2-15. C0900: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor Malfunction C0904: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn (except the C0904: U.S.A. and Canada) C0950: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor Malfunction C0954: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn . . . . . . T-91 . 2-16. C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure C0991: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure C0992: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure
ii
CONTENTS
C0993: Main Tray Upward Motion Failure C0994: Main Tray Elevator Motor M26s Failure to Turn . . . . . . . T-94 2-17. C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure C0999: Shifter Return Failure C099A: Shifter Return Failure C099b: Shifter Transfer Failure C099C: Shift Motor M27s Failure to Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-97 2-18. C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-100 2-19. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates Home C0d00: Position Detection Failure C0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit Home Position Detection C0d00: Failure C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31s Failure to Turn C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at Abnormal C0d00: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-105 3 Power is not Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-109
iii
1 INTRODUCTION
1-1. General Precautions
1. When servicing the copier with its covers removed, use utmost care to prevent your hands, clothing, and tools from being caught in revolving parts including the chains and gears. When servicing the copier with the Lower Rear Cover removed, be sure to install the jig. 2. Before attempting to replace parts and unplugging connectors, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet. 3. Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and on the printed circuit. 4. When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified in the text, be sure to use the green wire (GND). 5. When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from the wall outlet of the same line, take necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to overloads. 6. Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will be lost or damaged.
Pattern 2 Step Check Item 1 Is --? Result YES NO 2 Action Do this. Check that.
T-1
3. Methed for Checking Control Parts with Loads To check the Control parts with loads easier and safer, this copier allows the Technical Representative to determine whether a control part is fully operational and signals are input and output properly by changing or checking the I/O port data of the board IC with the copier in the standby state (including where a misfeed or malfunction condition exists). Procedure 1) On the circuit diagram accompanying the text, locate the I/O port of the control part which is probably faulty when a misfeed or malfunction occurs. 2) Select the function "Port" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode and show on the Message Display the screen containing the ports identified in step 1 above. (See SWITCHES ON PWBs.) NOTE: Some paper path sensors can be checked by the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check." 3) Change or check the input or output port data to check that the control part is operational and signals are input and output properly. 4) If the control part does not operate after the output port data has been changed, select "Control Board" of "I/O Check" and determine whether the cause of the problem is the board or any other functional unit. NOTE:The output ports that can be checked by "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode are only those given on p. T-63.
T-2
Checking a Control Part with a load by Changing the Output Port Data Example 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 is probably faulty when a misfeed occurs at the Paper Take-Up Section of the copier.
Procedure
1) From the circuit diagram accompanying the text, we know that the port on PWB-A for SL2 is the 8th one of P7 of the "Port" screens.
1136C01TAA
2) Select "Port" of "I/O Check" (see SWITCHES ON PWBs.) and show the following screen.
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T034AA
3) Move the cursor to P7 and move the underline to the 8th port. Check that the data for the 8th port of P7 is "1."
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T035AA
T-3
4) Press the Multi-Copy Key "0" to change the data from "1" to "0." Then, SL2 is energized for approx. 5 seconds.
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111110
1136T036AA SL2 is operational if it makes its operating sound. SL2 is faulty if no operating sound is heard.
Note: As soon as the data is changed, the underline moves to the leftmost port whose data can be changed. 5) If SL2 did not operate, run the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check."
6) The following message appears if no signals are output from PWB-A to SL2.
Note: See p. T-63 for malfunction codes for the output signals.
T-4
Checking a Control Part with a load by Changing the Input Port Data 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 is probably faulty when a misfeed occurs at the Paper Take-Up Section of the copier. Example 1: Using the function "Port" of "I/O Check"
Procedure
1) From the circuit diagram accompanying the text, we know that the port on PWB-A for PC56 is the 1st one of P11 of the "Port" screens.
1136C02TAA
2) Select "Port" of "I/O Check" (see SWITCHES ON PWBs) and show the following screen. At this time, check that the data for the 1st port of P11 is "H."
3) Open the Upper Right Door and move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC56. 4) Close the Upper Right Door to create a misfeed condition. 5) Select "Port" again and show the following screen.
T-5
6) Show the data for P11 and check that the data for the 1st port has changed from "H" to "L."
T-6
Procedure
1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check" and show the following screen. At this time, check that data for the 1st sensor code is "1."
T-7
10
10
8 9 3
9
8 3
1136T006DA
1136T007EA
Misfeed Location LEDs on Monitor Display Blinking There is a misfeed at that location. Light Steady Light There might be a sheet of paper stopped at that location.
Misfeed Location Multi bypass take-up and transport Copier take-up and vertical transport Paper Feed Cabinet take-up, vertical transport, Duplex Unit Automatic/Duplexing Document Feeder Transport/Separator Fusing/Exit Duplex Unit vertical transport Duplex Unit storage Sorter/Staple Sorter
T-8
Duplex Unit
Vertical Transport Sensor 1 PC30
Duplex Vertical
Transport Sensor 2 PC12
Vertical
Transport Sensor 3 PC17
Duplex Unit
Paper Entry Sensor PC14
Vertical
Transport Sensor 4 PC22
Duplex Unit
Turnover Path Sensor PC13
T-9
Duplex Unit
Vertical Transport Sensor 1 PC30
1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57
Duplex Vertical
Transport Sensor 2 PC12
Vertical
Transport Sensor 3 PC17
Duplex Unit
Paper Entry Sensor PC14
Duplex Unit
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16
Duplex Unit
Turnover Path Sensor PC13
Vertical
Transport Detection Sensor 4 PC22
3rd Drawer
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21
4th Drawer
Paper Take-Up Sensor PC29
T-10
ON SL2 OFF
H
Approx. 2.57sec
PC56
1136T33TCA
Paper take-up failure detection 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 2.57 seconds after 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL3 has been energized. PC56 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T seconds (which varies for different paper sizes) after it has been blocked (L). PC57 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T seconds (which varies for different paper sizes) after it has been blocked (L).
SL3 PC57
ON OFF
H L
Approx. 2.57sec
1136T34TCA
PC56
PC57
PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 1.31 seconds after PC56 has been blocked (L).
PC56 PC54
L H L
Approx. 1.31sec
1136T37TCA
PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 2.0 seconds after PC57 has been blocked (L).
PC57 PC54
L H L
Approx. 2.0sec
1136T38TCA
T-11
Multi Bypass Misfeed Type PC54 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 1.48 seconds after Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 has been energized. Detection Timing
ON CL3 OFF
H
Approx. 1.48sec
PC54
1136T39TCA
Transport/Separator Misfeed Type Trailing edge detection by Transport Roller Sensor PC54 Leading edge detection by Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 Detection Timing PC54 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of T seconds (which varies for different paper sizes) after the TRON signal has been input.
TRON
H
1136T40TCA
PC55 is not blocked (L) even after the lapse of approx. 0.63 seconds after PC54 has been blocked (L).
PC54 PC55
L H L
Approx. 0.63sec
1136T41TCA
PC55 is not unblocked (H) even after the lapse of approx. 0.69 seconds after PC54 has been unblocked (H).
PC54 PC55
L H L
Approx. 0.69sec
1136T42TCA
Fusing/Exit Misfeed Type Leading edge detection by Paper Exit Switch S53 S53 is not deactuated (L) even after the lapse of approx. 3.36 seconds after the TRON signal has been input. Detection Timing
TRON
Approx. 3.36sec
ON S53 OFF
1136T43TCA
S53 is not actuated (H) even after the lapse of approx. 3.58 seconds after PC55 has been unblocked (H).
PC55
Approx. 3.58sec
ON S53 OFF
1136T44TCA
T-12
1136T008AA
1136C04TAA
T-13
x Copier Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Dose the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Are the Separator Fingers on both sides of the Drawer in position? Are the Separator Fingers deformed? Is the Trailing Edge Stop or Edge Guide in good position? Are the Paper Lifting Springs positioned correctly? Are the Paper Take-Up Rolls deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-8 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-8 set to "1"? Replace PWB-A. Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Instruct the user to load the paper so that it rests under the Fingers. Replace the Fingers. Change the position of the Edge Stop or Guide. Change the position of the Springs or add one as necessary. Clean or replace the Paper Take-Up Rolls.
Paper is
stationary before the Paper Take-Up Sensor. 2
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T044AA
NO
4) Does SL2 operate when the data for P7-8 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0328" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run?
YES
NO
T-14
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL3 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-7 set to "1"?
Result
Action
Replace PWB-A.
10
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T045AA
NO
4) Does SL3 operate when the data for P7-7 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0327" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Is the Clutch Spring deformed or worn?
YES
11
NO
12
YES
T-15
Symptom
Step 1
Check Item Are the Vertical Transport Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Is the Paper Take-Up Guide Plate or Vertical Transport Guide Plate dirty or deformed? Check 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 1 is set to "1."
Result YES
Action Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Rollers. Correct, replace, or clean the Guide Plate.
Paper is
stationary at the Vertical Transport Section.
YES
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC56. 3) Has the data for 1 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC56. Replace PWB-A. YES
T-16
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC57 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 2 is set to "1."
Result
Action
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC57. 3) Has the data for 2 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC57. Replace PWB-A. YES
Check Paper Transport Clutch CL1 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-4 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-4 set to "1"? 5 Replace PWB-A.
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T050AA
NO
4) Does CL1 operate when the data for P7-4 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0324" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run?
Perform step 6. NO
YES
NO
T-17
Symptom
Step 1
Check Item Are the Transport Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check Transport Roller Sensor PC54 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 9 is set to "1."
Result YES
Paper is
stationary at the Transport Rollers.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC54. 3) Has the data for 9 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC54. Replace PWB-A. YES
T-18
1136C03TAA
T-19
x Transport/Separator Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code A is set to "1." Check the actuator for operation. Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.
Paper is
stationary at the Synchronizing Roller.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC55. 3) Has the data for A changed from "1" to "0" ? Replace PC55.
NO
T-20
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-5 set to "1"?
Result
Action
Replace PWB-A.
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T055CA
NO
4) Does CL2 operate when the data for P7-5 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C0325" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Is a given length of loop formed before the Synchronizing Roller? Is the Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate deformed or dirty? Are the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona Wires deteriorated or dirty? Is the Paper Guide above the Paper Separator Corona deformed or dirty? Are the Synchronizing Rollers deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check the Paper Separator Corona Remote signal from the PWB-A. 5
YES
NO
NO
Adjust the loop length using Tech. Rep. Choice SCH-23 (Loop Length Adjustment). Correct, clean, or replace the Guide Plate. Clean the wires or replace the Coronas Unit.
Paper is
stationary near the PC Drum. 1
YES
YES
YES
Clean or replace the Paper Guide. Clean or replace the Synchronizing Rollers. Replace PWB-A.
YES
T-21
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check Separator Solenoid SL1 for operation. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P6-2 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P6-2 set to "1"?
Result
Action
Paper is wedged
at the Paper Separator Fingers.
Replace PWB-A.
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T056CA
NO
4) Does SL1 operate when the data for P6-2 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Does the malfunction code "C031F" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Are the Paper Separator Fingers deformed or dirty?
YES
NO
YES
T-22
Symptom
Step 1
Check Item Referring to step 2 on p. T-18, check Transport Roller Sensor PC54. Referring to step 2 on p. T-20, check Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55. Do the Suction Belts turn properly? Check Suction Fan Motor M4 for rotation.(See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P6-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P6-3 set to "0"?
Result
Action
Paper is
stationary on the Suction Belts.
NO
Replace PWB-A.
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T057CA
NO
Is M4 turning at half speed at this time? 4) Does the M4 speed change from half to full speed when the data for P6-3 is changed from "0" to "1"? Does the malfunction code "C0320" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Perform step 5. NO
YES
NO
T-23
Name Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch Master Board
1136T010AA
1136C05TAA
T-24
x Multi Bypass Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step Check Item Is the paper fed out of the copier properly when it is taken up and fed in from the 1st or 2nd Drawer? Does the following message appear when a sheet of paper is placed on the Multi Bypass Table? 2 YES Result Action Perform the troubleshooting procedure for "Copier Take-Up Misfeed" or "Transport/Separator Misfeed." Remove the paper and perform step 3.
NO
NO
Perform step 4.
X1.000 M FEED
1136T058CA
Check Manual Feed Paper Empty Sensor PC51 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P12-2 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P12-2 set to "H" (when no paper is loaded). NO Check the actuator for operation.
3) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC51. 4) Reselect "Port."
5) Show the data for P12-2. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?
Replace PC51. NO
T-25
Symptom
Step 4
Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 for operation (lowering the Paper Take-Up Rolls) as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P13-8 2) Select the function "Port."
Result NO
Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.
YES
Replace PWB-A.
NO
4) Does SL4 operate to lower the Paper Take-Up Rolls when the data for P13-8 is changed from "1" to "0"? Does the malfunction code "C0316" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Check Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P7-6 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-6 set to "1"?
YES
NO
Replace PWB-A.
P5 P6 P7
HHH HL 10 HH H 11111111
1136T063AA
NO
4) Does CL3 operate when the data for P7-6 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.)
T-26
Symptom
Step
Check Item Does the malfunction code "C0326" appear when the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode is run? Is the Pressure Pad or Guide Plate deformed or dirty? Are the Paper Take-Up Rolls deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?
Result YES
NO
10
YES
Clean or replace the Pressure Pad or Guide Plate. Clean or replace the Paper Take-Up Rolls.
11
YES
T-27
1136T011AA
1136C06TAA
T-28
x Fusing/Exit Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Is the Pre-Fusing Guide Plate dirty with toner? Referring to steps 3, 4, and 5 on p. T-23, check the Suction Belts and Suction Fan Motor M4 for rotation. Are the Fusing Rollers scratched or dirty? Or, has the replacement time arrived for the Rollers? Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty with toner or worn? Are their edges damaged? Is the Oil Roller dirty? Or, has the replacement time arrived for the Roller? Check Paper Exit Switch S53 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code B is set to "1." Check the actuator for operation. Clean or replace the Rollers. YES Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Correct or clean, or replace, the Guide Plate.
Paper is
stationary before the Fusing Roller.
YES
The paper is
stationary at the Fusing Roller. 1
YES
Paper is
stationary after the Paper Exit Roller/Rolls.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to deactuate S53. 3) Has the data for B changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace S53. Replace PWB-A. YES
T-29
3-5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed (Except the U.S.A. and Canada)
Name 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Vertical Transport Sensor 4 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Vertical Transport Drive Motor 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202 Master Board
1136C23TAA
T-30
x PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Is the Paper Take-Up Motor (M22 or M23) turning when the Start Key is pressed? 3 NO Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. Check for possible overload. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check the Motor (M22 or 23).
Paper is
stationary before the Paper Take-Up Sensor. 2
YES YES
Is the Paper Take-Up Roll or Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 3 is set to "1."
YES
Paper is
stationary before the Vertical Transport Rollers.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC21. 3) Has the data for 3 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC21. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-31
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC29 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 4 is set to "1."
Result
Action
Paper is
stationary before the Vertical Transport Rollers.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC29. 3) Has the data for 4 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC29. Replace PWB-A or PF-202 PWB-A. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check M21. Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.
YES
Is Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 turning when the Start Key is pressed?
NO
YES Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?
YES
T-32
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check PC22 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 8 is set to "1."
Result
Action
Paper is
stationary near Vertical Transport Detection Sensor 4 PC22.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC22. 3) Has the data for 8 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC22. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?
NO
Check the Paper Feed Cabinet for positive connection to the copier. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.
YES
T-33
Name 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor Vertical Transport Sensor 4 Vertical Transport Drive Motor 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board
T-34
x PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Does the paper being used meet product specifications? Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Is 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Motor M22 turning when the Start Key is pressed? Result NO Action Instruct the user to use the paper that meets product specifications. Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check M22.
Paper is
stationary before 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21. 2
YES
NO
YES Is the Paper Take-Up Roll or Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC21 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 3 is set to "1."
Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Paper Take-Up or Separator Roll.
YES
Paper is
stationary before the Vertical Transport Rollers.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC21. 3) Has the data for 3 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC21. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-35
Symptom
Step
Check Item Is Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 turning when the Start Key is pressed?
Result
Action First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check M21.
NO
YES Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check PC22 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 8 is set to "1."
Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.
YES
Paper is
stationary near Vertical Transport Detection Sensor 4 PC22.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC22. 3) Has the data for 8 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC22. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
Is the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?
NO
Check the Paper Feed Cabinet for positive connection to the copier. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Roller or Guide Plate.
YES
T-36
1136C25TAA
T-37
x Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Exit/Duplex Solenoid SL5 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P7-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P7-1 set to "1"? 2 Replace EP2050 PWB-A. Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.
Paper is
stationary near the Exit Section.
HLH HL P5 P6 10 LH H P7 11111111
1136T075CA
NO
4) Does SL5 operate when the data for P7-1 is changed from "1"to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Are the Exit/Duplex Switching Plate and Upper and Lower Guide Plates deformed or dirty?
YES
Check the Clutch Spring for deformation and wear. Replace SL5.
T-38
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 for operation as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-1 set to "1"?
Result
Action
Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section of the Duplex Unit.
1 11 LHHH
1136T076CA
NO
First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.
4) Does M31 operate when the data for P42-1 is changed from"1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.)
NO
First check Duplex drive connections. Then, if necessary, replace M31, PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload.
YES Check Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Sensor 1 PC30 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code C is set to "1."
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC30. 3) Has the data for C changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC30. Replace EP2050 PWB-A . YES
T-39
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check Duplex Vertical Transport Sensor 2 PC12 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 1) Port: P8-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P8-3 set to "H"?
Result
Action
Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section of the Duplex Unit.
4) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC12. 5) Select "Port" again.
6) Show the data for P8-3. Has it been changed from "H" to "L"?
NO
YES
T-40
Symptom
Step
Check Item Are the Paddle Roller, Slip Roller/Rolls, and Rolls B Release Lever deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?
Result NO
Action Check the drive connection from the Duplex Unit. Clean or replace the Roller and/or Roll. Check the Release Lever mechanism.
Paper is
stationary near the Turnover Section. 1
YES
Check Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor PC13 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 1) Port: P22-4 (PF-202) P38-4 (PF-102) P30-4 (PF-2D) 2) Select the function "Port." 3) <For PF-202> Is the data for P22-4 set to "H"? Check the actuator for operation. Check PC13.
LLHHL11 H LHHL
1136T146AA
NO
00 00 LLHLH L
1136T083AA
T-41
Symptom
Step
Result
Action
6) <For PF-202> Show the data for P22-4. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?
NO
Replace PC13. First replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
<For PF-102> Show the data for P38-4. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?
YES
<For PF-2D> Show the data for P30-4. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?
00 00 LLLLH L
1136T087AA
T-42
Symptom
Step 1
Result NO YES
Action Check the Mylar moving mechanism. Clean or replace the Mylar.
Check Duplex Unit Gate Switching Solenoid SL31 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-5 set to "1"? 2 First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.
1 11 LHHH
1136T088AA
NO
4) Does SL31 operate when the data for P42-5 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Check Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor PC14 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code D is set to "1."
NO
Replace SL31. Check the Clutch Spring for deformation and wear.
YES
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC14. 3) Has the data for D changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC14. First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.
YES
T-43
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check Duplex Unit Paper Empty Sensor PC15 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 1) Move the actuator with a sheet or paper to block PC15. 2) Slide the Duplex unit back in. 3) Is the following message on the control panel ?
Result
Action
Paper is
stationary near the take-up port of the Duplex Unit.
First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102 PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary. YES
4) Remove the sheet of paper to unblock PC15. 5) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P43-6 set to "H"?
NO
6) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC15. 7) Select "Port" again.
8) Show the data for P43-6. Has it changed from "H" to "L"?
NO
Replace PC15. First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102 PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.
YES
T-44
1136C26TAA
T-45
x Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure Symptom Step 1 Check Item Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Check Duplex Unit Pick-Up Solenoid SL33 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-2 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-2 set to "1"? 2 First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary. Result YES Action Change the paper. Instruct the user in how to store the paper.
NO
4) Does SL33 operate when the data for P42-2 is changed from "1"to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Check Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Clutch CL31 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P42-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-5 set to "1"? 3
NO
YES
NO
First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.
4) Does CL31 operate when the data for P42-5 is changed from "1"to "0"? (Check for the sound of operation.) Are the Take-Up Roll, Feed Roll, and Separator Roll deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust?
NO
YES
T-46
Symptom
Step
Check Item Is Vertical Transport Drive Motor M21 turning when a copy is taken up and fed into the copier from the Duplex Unit?
Result
Action First check Duplex drive connections. Then, if necessary, replace M21, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload. Clean or replace the Vertical Transport Rollers and Guide Plate.
Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section.
NO
YES Are the Vertical Transport Rollers and Guide Plate deformed, worn, or dirty with paper dust? Check Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor PC16 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code E is set to "1."
YES
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC16. 3) Has the data for E changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC16. First replace PWB-G, then replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, if necessary.
YES
T-47
Symptom
Step
Check Item Check Vertical Transport Sensor 3 PC17 as follows. (See p. T-7.) 1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" and check to see if the data for sensor code 7 is set to "1."
Result
Action
Paper is
stationary near the Vertical Transport Section.
NO
2) Move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC17. 3) Has the data for 7 changed from "1" to "0"? NO Replace PC17. First replace PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-48
3 MALFUNCTIONS
The copier CPU is capable of self-diagnosis of the copier conditions and, when detecting a malfunction, it shows the corresponding malfunction code on the Message Display. Each malfunction code indicates the particular part which has developed a malfunction and the type of malfunction.
Represents the malfunction detail. Indicates the particular malfunctioning part in the section. Indicates the malfunctioning section.
Malfunction Resetting Procedure After the source of the malfunction has been eliminated: Press the Trouble Reset Switch on Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board PWB-I for an Exposure Lamp failure (C04**) and fusing failure (C05**). Swing open and close the Front Door for any other malfunctions. Disconnect and connect the option or open and close the option door for malfunctions of options.
1. Detection Timing Code Description Detection Timing The Main Drive Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M1 has been energized.
ON M1 OFF
Main Drive Motor Lock Signal
H L
1sec
1.5sec
1136T45TCA
Drive
The Main Drive Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M1 has been deenergized.
ON M1 OFF
Main Drive Motor Lock Signal
H L
1sec
1.5sec
1136T46TCA
T-49
Code
Description
Detection Timing The Suction Fan Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M4 has been energized.
ON OFF
H L
M4
1sec
1.5sec
1136T47TCA
The Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M5 has been energized.
ON OFF
H L
M5
1sec
1.5sec
1136T48TCA
C004b Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 turning at abnormal timing Drive
The Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a continuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M5 has been deenergized.
ON OFF
H L
M5
1sec
1.5sec
1136T49TCA
The output from Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 does not go HIGH within 5 seconds after M8 has been energized.
ON OFF
H 5sec L
M8 PC35
1136T18TAA
The output from PC35 does not go LOW within 10 seconds after it has gone HIGH following the energization of M8.
ON OFF
10sec H L
M8 PC35
1136T19TAA
T-50
Code
Description
Detection Timing The PC35 output is HIGH 2 seconds after M8 has been deenergized.
ON OFF
H L
M8 PC35
2sec
1136T20TAA
When the current toner-to-carrier ratio is 2% lower than the SCH-90 setting and the Add Toner Indicator is not lit on the control panel, a toner replenishing sequence is carried out (M9 is turned); the toner-to-carrier ratio does not increase 1% within 140 seconds or 2% within 220 seconds.
Drive
The Short Circuit Detection signal (SCD) remains LOW for a continuous 600-msec. period while the PC Drum Charge Corona or Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas remain ON.
ON OFF
H L 600msec
1136T50TCA
The output from AE Sensor Board PWB-H has not become 4.0 V or less for the period between when LA1 turns ON and the Scanner starts a scan motion and when the Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) turns ON (goes LOW).
LA1 BASE PWB-H ON OFF
H L
4.0V
1136T22TAA
T-51
Code
Description
Detection Timing The output from PWB-H remains 4.0 V or less for a continuous 3-second period at any timing while the output from Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 remains LOW.
H
PC81 L 4 .0V
3.0sec
Exposure Lamp
PWB-H
1136T23TAA
The output from PWB-H remains 4.0 V or less for a continuous 3-second period while the output from Size Reset Switch S108 remains LOW (i.e., while the Original Cover remains closed).
H
Fusing Unit
When Power Switch S1 or Front Door Interlock Switch S21 is ON, the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller: (Less than 165C) * Does not reach 100C within 180 seconds. * Does not reach 150C within 60 seconds after it has reached 100C. * Does not reach 175C within 60 seconds after it has reached 150C. * Does not reach 200C within 240 seconds after it has reached 150C. (165C or more) * Does not reach 200C within 60 seconds. After the copier has left the Energy Saver mode:
T-52
Code
Description
Detection Timing Where no encoder pulses are input to SCP Board PWB-J for 100 to 130 msec. while M2 is turning, the Forward/Backward Rotation signal from PWB-J does not go from LOW to HIGH, or vice versa, when an attempt is made to turn M2 backward.
ON OFF
M2
Encoder Pulse
100 to 130msec
Where no encoder pulses are input to SCP Board PWB-J for 100 to 130 msec. while M2 is turning, the Forward/Backward Rotation signal from PWB-J goes from LOW to HIGH, or vice versa, when an attempt is made to turn M2 backward.
M2
ON OFF
Encoder Pulse
100 to 130msec
<At the start of the Scanners scan motion> PC81 is not unblocked H even after the lapse of a given period of time. <At the end of the Scanners return motion> PC81 is not blocked L even after the lapse of a given period of time. The M2 speed control does not change from the Acceleration to Constant Speed control for the period between when the SHOME signal goes LOW and when a LOW TRON signal is detected.
Acceleration Constant Speed
M2
1136T53TCA
T-53
Code
Description
Detection Timing <During prescan> When the Scanner is at a position other than home, the SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after S1 has been turned ON. The SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SCEND signal has gone from LOW to HIGH. <During a copy cycle> When the Scanner is at a position other than home, the SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 7 seconds after the SCAN signal has gone LOW. The SHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SCEND signal has gone from LOW to HIGH. The SHOME signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 7 seconds after it has gone LOW. The BASE signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SHOME signal has gone HIGH. <During prescan> The BASE signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the TRON signal has gone LOW. <During prescan> The TRON signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the BASE signal has gone LOW. <During a copy cycle> The TRON signal does not go LOW even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the SHOME signal has gone HIGH. <During prescan> The TRON signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 5 seconds after the BASE signal has gone HIGH. <During prescan> The SCEND signal lapse of 5 seconds HIGH. <During a copy cycle> The SCEND signal lapse of 5 seconds HIGH. does not go LOW even after the after the TRON signal has gone
C06F1 SHOME signal failure C06F2 BASE signal failure Optical Section (Scanner) C06F3 BASE signal failure
does not go LOW even after the after the SHOME signal has gone
The SCEND signal does not go HIGH even after the lapse of 5 seconds after it has gone LOW.
T-54
Code
Description
Detection Timing The output from Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90 does not go from HIGH to LOW, or vice versa, even after the lapse of a given period of time after Lens Motor M6 has been energized.
Optical Section (Lens) C0620 4th/5th Mirrors motion failure Optical Section (Mirror)
The output from Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86 does not go from HIGH to LOW, or vice versa, even after the lapse of a given period of time after Mirror Motor M7 has been energized.
T-55
Code
Description
Detection Timing The LA3 Malfunction signal remains HIGH for a continuous 1-second period while LA3 remains ON.
LA3
ON OFF
1.0sec H L
1136T54TCA
Erase Lamps
The LA3 Malfunction signal remains LOW for a continuous 1-second period while LA3 remains OFF.
LA3
ON OFF
1.0sec H L
1136T55TCA
C0E20 Image Erase Lamp LA2s failure to turn ON C0F02 Original Size Detecting Board UN2 malfunction
The LA2 gate array is defective according to the self-diagnoses made immediately after Main Drive Motor M1 has been deenergized. In F7 test operation: 1) The Busy signal does not go LOW within approx. 800 msec. after the Initial signal has gone LOW, or undefined data is input to the master CPU. 2) If 1 is checked okay, the Busy signal goes HIGH within approx. 200 msec. 3) If both 1 and 2 are checked okay, the Busy signal does not go HIGH within approx. 4,000 msec. 4) If 1, 2, and 3 are checked okay, undefined data is input to master CPU within approx. 500 msec.
H
Initial Signal L
Sensors
Busy Signal
4) 1) 3) 2) 800msec 200msec 400msec 500msec
1136T56TCA
Under normal conditions: 1) The Busy signal remains HIGH or LOW for approx. 3,000 msec. or more. 2) Undefined data is input to master CPU.
Busy Signal
70msec 70msec 3000msec 70msec 70msec
1136T57TCA
T-56
Code
Description
Detection Timing When S1 is turned ON: 1) The Busy signal remains HIGH or LOW for approx. 5,000 msec. or more. 2) Undefined data is input to master CPU.
5000msec. H Busy Signal L H
Sensors
T-57
Code
Description
Detection Timing and Sensor Layout <Detection Timing> After having read the output data from PC115 to PC119, UN2 determines that there is a failure. <Sensor Layout> (Metric Areas) : PC116, : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115, : PC119 (option) A to E: Sensor locations A
C0FE1 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE2 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE3 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FE4 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE5 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure Original Size Detecting Board C0FE6 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FE7 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FE8 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FE9 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FEA Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FEB Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FEC Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FED Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FEE Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FEF Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure
C D
A B
C D
T-58
Code
Description
Sensor Layout
C0FF0 Original Size Detecting Sensor failure C0FF1 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF2 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF3 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FF4 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF5 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FF6 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure Original Size Detecting Board C0FF7 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure B A (Metric Areas) : PC116, : PC117, : PC118 (option), : PC115, : PC119 (option) A to E: Sensor locations
C D
C0FF8 Original Size Detecting Sensors and failure C0FF9 Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FFA Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FFB Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure
C0FFC Original Size Detecting Sensors , , and failure C0FFD Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure C0FFE Original Size Detecting Sensors , , , and failure
C D
T-59
Code
Description
Detection Timing <In normal conditions> The output from PWB-H remains approx. 0.18 V or less for a continuous 2-second period when LA1 is OFF, PC81 output is LOW, or S108 output is LOW (i.e., the Original Cover is closed). <In F5 or FF test operation> The output from PWB-H is less than 1.8 V when 100% of PWB-H is illuminated. The output from PWB-H is 1.8 V or more when PWB-H is not illuminated. The output from PWB-H is outside the target range (1.8 0.05 V) when 50% of PWB-H is illuminated. <When the optimum LA1 voltage is changed after the intensity of LA1 light has been corrected> The output from PWB-H when 100% of PWB-H is illuminated is smaller than that for halftones stored in the F5 test operation. The output from PWB-H when PWB-H is not illuminated is smaller than that for halftones stored in the F5 test operation. The output from PWB-H when 50% of PWB-H is illuminated is outside the range of output for halftones stored in the F5 test operation 0.05 V. <At 1st F5 or FF test operation> The UN3 output is 0.95 V or more when all signals from the 4-bit analog switch are made LOW (i.e., with a maximum load resistance). The UN3 output is less than 1.05 V when all signals from the 4-bit analog switch are made HIGH (i.e., with a minimum load resistance). <In F5 or FF test operation> The AIDC Sensor output does not fall in the range between 1 V and less than 1.2 V when the intensity of the sensor LED is varied. <At the 1st F5 or FF test operation> 1) The grid voltage (VG) of 550 V (reference) is output. 2) A solid black pattern is produced. 3) If the AIDC Sensor output is less than 4.2 V at this time: The grid voltage does not become 4.2 V or more even when it is increased 3 steps (90 V). <At the 1st F5 or FF test operation> 1) LA1 is turned ON with 58 V (reference). 2) A halftone pattern is produced. 3) The LA1 output is varied so that the AIDC Sensor output falls within the target range. 4) The AIDC Sensor output does not fall within the target range even after steps 1 to 3 have been repeated eight times, the output value being outside the error level.
Sensors
T-60
Code
Description
Detection Timing The UN4 output remains approx. 0.18 V or less or 4.52 V or more for a continuous 3-second period while M1 remains energized. When the value shown for "Set" of "ATDC Level" of "Level History" is greatly different from the value set in the FF test operation:
C0900 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction C0904 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motors failure to turn C0950 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor malfunction C0954 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motors failure to turn C0d00 Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates home position detection failure PF-2D/AD-5 C0d20 Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit home position detection failure C0d50 Duplex Unit Drive Motors failure to turn C0d51 Duplex Unit Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing C0990 Main Tray upward motion failure C0991 Main Tray downward motion failure C0992 Main Tray downward motion failure C0993 Main Tray upward motion failure C0994 Main Tray Elevator Motors failure to turn C0996 3rd Drawer lock release failure PF-102 C0998 Shifter transfer failure C0999 Shifter return failure C099A Shifter return failure C099b Shifter transfer failure C099c Shift Motors failure to turn C0F79 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor failure Main Tray Paper Empty Board failure Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor See PF-102 Service Manual. See PF-2D/AD-5 Service Manual. See PF-202 Service Manual (except the U.S.A. and Canada).
T-61
Code ST-206/ S-205 ST-101/ S-104 ST-206/ S-205 C0b00 C0b01 C0b60 C0b61 C0b62 C0b63 C0b64 ST-101 ST-206 ST-206 C0b10
C0b11 Paper Clamp Unit motion failure C0b12 C0b13 C0b30 Paper Aligning Mechanism drive C0b31 failure C0b50 C0b51 Stapling failure C0b52
See ST-206/S-205 and ST-101/S-104 Service Manuals. See ST-206/S-205 Service Manual.
ST-101 ST-206
ST-206
C0b70 C0b71
T-62
The copier performs a self-diagnostic sequence to determine if the microprocessor outputs a signal to each of the IC ports on Master Board PWB-A properly. It is intended for detecting the following malfunctions (C03). If the microprocessor fails to output any of these signals or if any of the electronic components on the board (driver IC, etc.) is faulty, the copier determines that there is a faulty condition existing and shows on the Message Display the corresponding malfunction code.
The input signal starting the diagnostic C0300 sequence does not go HIGH. C0311 AVR PWM C0312 H1 REM C0313 Grid PWM C0314 PWB-H PWM C0315 SL-4 UP C0316 SL-4 DOWN C0317 LA2 DATA C0318 LA2 MODE C0319 LA2 CLK C031A LA2 STROBE C031B M8 REM C031C M9 REM C031D AVR REM C031E SCAN C031F SL1 REM C0320 M4 Switching
IC1A P50 IC1A P51 IC1A P56 IC1A P60 IC5A APC1 IC5A APC0 IC1A P64 IC1A P65 IC1A P66 IC1A P67 IC4A APA3 IC4A APA2 IC4A APA1 IC4A APA0 IC4A APC6 IC4A APC5
T-63
2. Troubleshooting Procedures 2-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor M1s Failure to Turn C0010: Main Drive Motor M1 turning at abnormal timing
Symbol M1 PWB-A Name Main Drive Motor Master Board
1136C07TAA
T-64
Step
Check Item Perform the following steps to check if M1 turns when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P16-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P16-1 set to "1"?
Result
Action
Replace PWB-A.
NO
4) Does M1 turn when the data for P16-1 is changed from "1" to "0"? Perform the following steps to check the input signal when M1 is stationary (Main Drive Motor Lock signal). (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P12-7 2 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P12-7 set to "H"?
YES
Perform step 3.
NO
YES
YES
T-65
2-2. C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4s Failure to Turn C004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5s Failure to Turn C004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning at Abnormal Timing
Symbol M4 M5 PWB-A Name Suction Fan Motor Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Master Board
1136C09TAA
T-66
* C0040
Step 1 Check Item Is M4 turning at half speed when the copier is in the standby state? Perform the following steps to check if M4 speed changes from half to full speed when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P6-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P6-3 set to "0"? 2 Replace PWB-A. Result NO Action Perform step 3.
P5 HHH LL P6 10 LH H P7 11111111
1136T103AA
NO
4) Does M4 start turning at full speed when the data for P6-3 is changed from "0" to "1"? Perform the following steps to check the input signal when M4 is turning at half speed (Suction Fan Motor Lock signal). (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P8-7 3 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P8-7 set to "L"?
Replace M4. NO
NO
YES
T-67
1136C08TAA
T-68
* C004A, C004b
Step Check Item Perform the following steps to check if M5 turns when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P16-4 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P16-4 set to "1"? 1 Replace PWB-A. Result Action
NO
4) Does M5 turn when the data for P16-4 is changed from "1" to "0"? Perform the following steps to check the input signal when M5 is stationary (Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal). (See p. T-3, 4) 1) Port: P8-6 2 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P8-6 set to "H"?
YES
Perform step 3.
NO
YES
YES
T-69
2-3. C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8s Failure to Turn C0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning at Abnormal Timing C0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9s Failure to Turn
Symbol M8 M9 PC35 S106 PWB-A Name Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch Master Board
1136C10TAA
T-70
* C0070, C0071
Step 1 2 Check Item Is C0071 being shown? Does the Toner Bottle turn when 2 to 3 copies are made with the Original Cover raised? Make 2 to 3 copies with the Original Cover raised. Does the voltage across PJ20AB-3 on PWB-A and GND become DC0V when the Toner Bottle turns and DC5V when the Toner Bottle is stationary? Make 2 to 3 copies with the Original Cover raised. Does the voltage across PJ20AA-4 on PWB-A and GND become DC0V when the Toner Bottle turns and DC24V when the Toner Bottle is stationary? Result YES NO YES Replace PWB-A. Check the Toner Bottle Holder or replace PC35. Action Perform step 3. Perform step 4.
NO
YES
NO
* C0072
Step 1 2 3 4 Check Item Is PJ20A securely plugged into PWB-A? Is CN35 connected securely? Are CN38 and CN44 connected securely? Is toner not moving along the Toner Conveying Screw of the Developing Unit? Is the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper so scarce that the system detects a toner-empty condition? Check the input signal from S106 when a toner-empty condition is detected as follows. (See p. T-5, 6) 6 1) Port: P5-7 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P5-7 set to "L"? Check the output signal to M9 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4) 7 1) Port: P4-6 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P4-6 set to "0"? YES NO Replace M9. Replace PWB-A. NO YES Replace S106. Replace PWB-A. Result NO NO NO YES YES NO Action Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Connect them securely. Check the toner path. Perform step 6. Perform step 7.
T-71
1136C11TAA
T-72
Step
Check Item Does "C0200" remain shown even after the PC Drum Charge and Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas have been removed from the copier? Does "C0200" appear when the PC Drum Charge Corona is installed in the copier? Does "C0200" appear when the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas are installed in the copier? Does "C0200" remain shown even after CN1 has been unplugged from HV1?
Result
YES
YES
Clean or replace the PC Drum Charge Corona. Clean or replace the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas. Replace HV1. Replace PWB-A.
YES
NO YES
T-73
2-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1s Failure to Turn ON C0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at Abnormal Timing
Symbol LA1 TF2 PWB-A PWB-H PU2 Name Exposure Lamp Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse Master Board AE Sensor Board Power Supply Unit
1136C12TAA
T-74
Step
Check Item Perform the following steps to check if LA1 turns ON when the Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P4-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P4-7 set to "1"?
Result
Action
Replace PWB-A.
P2 1111HHL1 P3 1 L 1 H P4 11111111
1136T107AA
NO
4) Does LA1 turn ON when the data for P4-7 is changed from "1" to "0"? Is the circuit across CN7-1 and 2 on the LA1 side conductive when CN7 (2P) is disconnected? Is the voltage across PJ3-1 and 3 on PU2 AC100V? Is the voltage across PJ4AA-6 and GND 4.0 V or less when the Power Switch is turned ON or in the standby state?
YES
Perform step 4.
YES NO YES NO
Replace PU2 Check the power supply. Clean the AE Sensor or replace PWB-H. Replace PWB-A.
T-75
Warming-up Failure Abnormally Low Fusing Temperature Abnormally High Fusing Temperature Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Malfunction
Symbol H1 TS1 TH1 TH2 SSR1 PWB-A Name Fusing Heater Lamp Fusing Thermoswitch Fusing Front Thermistor Fusing Rear Thermistor SSR Master Board
1136C13TAA
T-76
* C0500, C0510
Step 1 Check Item Does H1 light up when the Power Switch is turned ON? Result YES NO 2 Disconnect CN47 (4P). Is the resistance across CN47-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side infinity? Disconnect CN48 (4P). Is the resistance across CN48-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side infinity? Check the H1 ON/OFF signal from PWB-A when the Front Door is closed with S1 turned ON. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P1-7 2) Select the function "Port." 4 3) Is the data for P1-7 set to "0"? Replace PWB-A. YES NO YES NO Action Check TH1/TH2 for installation or clean it. Perform step 4. Replace TH1. Replace PWB-A. Replace TH2. Replace PWB-A.
NO
Disconnect CN4 (16P). Is there continuity across CN4-8 and 9 on the Fusing Unit side?
YES NO
T-77
* C0520, C0522
Step 1 Check Item Does H1 remain lit up even after the copier has completed warming up? Check to see if H1 is turned OFF by changing the H1 ON/OFF signal from PWB-A. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P1-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P1-7 set to "1"? 2 Replace PWB-A. Result YES NO Action Perform step 2. Perform steps 3 and 4.
NO
4) Does H1 go out when the data for P1-7 is changed from "0" to "1"? Disconnect CN47 (4P). Is the circuit across CN47-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side short-circuited? Disconnect CN48 (4P). Is the circuit across CN48-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit side short-circuited?
NO YES NO YES NO
Replace SSR.
T-78
2-7. C0600: Scanner Motor M2 Malfunction C0601: SCP Board PWB-J Malfunction C0650: Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 Malfunction C0660: Scanner Load Failure C06F0 to C06F7: SHOME, BASE, TRON, and SCEND Signal Failure
Symbol PC81 M2 PWB-J PWB-A Name Scanner Reference Position Sensor Scanner Motor SCP Board Master Board
1136C14TAA
T-79
* C0600, C0601
Step 1 2 3 4 Check Item Is PJ6J securely plugged into PWB-J? Is the voltage across PJ6J-6 on PWB-J and GND DC5V when the Power Switch is turned ON? Is C0600 being shown? Is C0601 being shown? Result NO NO YES YES Replace M2. Replace PWB-J. Action Plug it in securely. Check the DC5V line.
* C0650
Step 1 2 Check Item Is PJ5J securely plugged into PWB-J and PJ43 into PC81? Is the Light Blocking Plate installed properly? Result NO NO YES Action Plug them in securely. Reinstall it. Replace PC81.
* C0660
Step 1 Check Item Do you feel an overload when you move the Scanner manually with the Power Switch OFF? Result YES Action Correct or replace the Cables or part being overloaded.
* C06F0 to C06F7
Step 1 Check Item Is PJ14AA securely plugged into PWB-A and PJ2J into PWB-J? Result NO YES Action Plug them in securely. Replace PWB-A or PWB-J.
T-80
2-8. C0610: Lens Motion Failure C0620: 4th/5th Mirrors Motion Failure
Symbol PC86 PC90 M6 M7 PWB-J Name Mirror Reference Position Sensor Lens Reference Position Sensor Lens Motor Mirror Motor SCP Board
1136C15TAA
T-81
* C0610
Step 1 Check Item Are PJ4J and PJ3J plugged securely into PWB-J, PJ47 into M6, and PJ31 into PC90? Does the voltage across PJ3J-2 on PWB-J and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC90 is blocked? Do you feel an overload when you move the Lens manually with the Power Switch OFF? Result NO Action Plug them in securely. Replace PC90. NO Correct or replace the Cable or part being overloaded. Replace M6 or PWB-J.
YES NO
* C0620
Step 1 Check Item Are PJ4J and PJ3J plugged securely into PWB-J, PJ48 into M7, and PJ32 into PC86? Does the voltage across PJ3J-5 on PWB-J and GND change from DC5V to DC0V when PC86 is blocked? Do you feel an overload when you move the 4th/5th Mirrors manually with the Power Switch OFF? Result NO Action Plug them in securely. Replace PC86. NO Correct or replace the part being overloaded. Replace M7 or PWB-J.
YES NO
T-82
2-9. C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA3s Failure to Turn ON C0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA3 turning ON at Abnormal Timing
Symbol LA3 PWB-A Name Main Erase Lamp Master Board
1136C16TAA
T-83
* C0E00
Step 1 Check Item Does LA3 light up when the Start Key is pressed? Does the voltage across PJ25-1 on PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when the Start Key is pressed? Result YES YES NO Action Replace PWB-A. Replace LA3. Replace PWB-A.
* C0E01
Step Check Item Perform the following steps to check the input signal when LA3 is OFF (LA3 Malfunction signal). (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P9-1 2) Select the function "Port." Is the data for P9-1 set to "H"? 2 YES Replace LA3. Result Action
NO
Replace PWB-A.
T-84
1136C17TAA
Step 1 2 3
Check Item Is PJ2A plugged securely into PWB-A? Is CN26 connected securely. Is the voltage across CN26-6 and GND DC5V?
Result NO NO YES NO
Action Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Replace LA2. Check the 5V line.
T-85
2-11. C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Malfunction C0FE1 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor Failure
Symbol PC115 PC116 PC117 PC118 Name Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3
1136C18TAA
T-86
* C0F02
Step 1 2 3 Check Item Is the jumper connector fitted properly across J1 and J2 on UN2? Are PJ62 plugged securely into UN2 and PJ14A into PWB-A? Is the voltage across PJ14AB-6 on PWB-A and GND changing between DC0V and 5V? Result NO NO YES NO Action Change the position of the jumper connector. Plug it in securely. Replace PWB-A. Replace UN2.
* C0FE1 to C0FFF
Step 1 2 Check Item Is the jumper connector fitted properly across J1 and J2 on UN2? Is each Original Size Detecting Sensor installed at the correct position? Does the malfunction code reappear after the corresponding Original Size Detecting Sensor has been replaced? Result NO NO Action Change the position of the jumper connector. Install it correctly.
YES
A to E: Sensor Positions A
C D
C D
A B
1336C19TAA
T-87
Step
Check Item Is the voltage across PJ4AA-6 on PWB-A and GND 0.18 V or less when the Scanner is at its home position, LA1 OFF, and the Original Cover closed?
Result YES NO
Action Check the photo receiver of PWB-H for contamination or replace PWB-H. Replace PWB-A.
T-88
2-13. C0F20: AIDC Sensor UN3 Variation Correction Failure C0F21: AIDC Sensor UN3 Contamination Correction Failure C0F22: AIDC Sensor UN3 V G Correction Failure C0F23: AIDC Sensor UN3 Exposure Correction Failure
Symbol UN3 PWB-A AIDC Sensor Master Board Name
1136C20TAA
Step 1 2 3 4
Check Item Is PJ20AA plugged securely into PWB-A? Is CN35 connected securely? Is UN3 installed at the correct position? Is the photo receiver or LED of UN3 dirty?
Result NO NO NO YES NO
Action Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Install it at the correct position. Clean UN3. Replace UN3 or PWB-A.
T-89
2-14. C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure C0F31: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure
Symbol UN4 PWB-A Name ATDC Sensor Master Board
1136C21TAA
Step 1 2 3 4 5
Check Item Is the value for "Set" of "ATDC Level" of "Level History" equal to the value given on the Adjust Label? Is PJ20AB plugged securely into PWB-A? Is CN35 connected securely? Is UN4 installed at the correct position? Is the voltage across PJ20AB-8 on PWB-A and GND in the range between DC0.18V and 4.52V while M1 is turning?
Result NO NO NO NO YES NO
Action Enter the value given on the Adjust Label. Plug it in securely. Connect it securely. Install it at the correct position. Replace PWB-A. Replace UN4.
T-90
2-15. C0900: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Failure C0904: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn (except the U.S.A. and Canada) C0950: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Failure C0954: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motors Failure to Turn
Symbol PC19 PC23 PC27 PC28 M24 M25 PWB-A PWB-A Name 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor Pulse Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202 Master Board
1136C28TAA
T-91
* C0900, C0950
Step 1 Check Item Is C0950 being shown? Block PC19 and make the following checks. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P21-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P21-5 set to "L"? Result YES Action Perform step 3.
NO
Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy. Check PC19.
4) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and press down the Pressure Release Lever of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy (to unblock PC19). 5) Select "Port" again.
6) Show the data for P21-5. Has the data changed from "L" to "H"?
NO
Replace PC19.
YES
Block PC23 and make the following checks. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P20-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P20-1 set to "L"?
NO
Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy. Check PC23.
4) Slide out the 4th Drawer and press down the Pressure Release Lever of the Take-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy (to unblock PC23).
T-92
Step
Result
Action
6) Show the data for P20-1. Has the data changed from "L" to "H"?
NO
Replace PC23.
YES
* C0904, C0954
Step 1 2 Check Item Is C0954 being shown? Does M24 turn when the 3rd Drawer is slid out and then into the copier? Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V, and then back to DC0V, after the 3rd Drawer has been slid into position? Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V when the 3rd Drawer is slid out and then into the copier (while M24 is turning). Result YES YES Action Begin with step 5. Perform step 4. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M24. Check the pulse disk. Replace PC27. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears for overload. Perform step 7. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M25. Check the pulse disk. Replace PC28. First replace PF-202 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears for overload.
NO YES NO
YES
Does M25 turn when the 4th Drawer is slid out and then into the copier? Does the voltage across PJ11A-1 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V, and then back to DC0V, after the 4th Drawer has been slid into position? Does the voltage across PJ10A-9 on PF-202 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V when the 4th Drawer is slid out and then into the copier (while M25 is turning).
YES
NO YES NO
YES
T-93
2-16. C0990: Main C0991: Main C0992: Main C0993: Main C0994: Main
Upward Motion Failure Downward Motion Failure Downward Motion Failure Upward Motion Failure Elevator Motor M26s Failure to Turn
Symbol PC2 PC5 PC19 M26 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-H Name Main Tray Lower Position Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor Main Tray Elevator Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board Cabinet Transport Board
1136T029AA
T-94
* C0990, C0991
Step 1 Check Item Is C0991 being shown? Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC19 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P37-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P37-5 set to "H"? 2 NO Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Paper Take-Up/Feed Roll Assy. Check PC19. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.
YES
Move the PC19 actuator to block PC19 and check PC19 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P37-5 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P37-5 set to "L"? 3 NO Check the Pressure Release mechanism of the Paper Take-Up/Feed Roll Assy. Replace PC19. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-95
* C0992, C0993
Step 1 Check Item Is C0993 being shown? Slide out the 3rd Drawer, block PC2, and check PC2 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-7 2) Select the function "Port." 2 3) Is the data for P39-7 set to "L"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC2. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.
LLHHL10 H LHLL
1136T119AA
YES
Unblock PC2 and check PC2 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3 3) Is the data for P39-7 set to "H"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC2. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
LLHHL11 H LHHL
1136T120AA
YES
* C0994
Step 1 Check Item Does M26 turn when the Paper Descent Key is pressed? Does the voltage across PJ11A-1 (down) on PF-102 PWB-A and GND, and across PJ11A-2 (up) and GND, change from DC0V to DC24V when the Drawer is slid in or the Paper Descent Key is pressed? (M26) Does the voltage across PJ10A-5 on PF-102 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V while M26 is turning? (PC5) Result YES Action Perform step 3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M26 or check PWB-H and flat cable. Check the pulse disk, PC5, and PWB-H. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears and for overload.
NO
YES NO
YES
T-96
2-17. C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure C0999: Shifter Return Failure C099A: Shifter Return Failure C099b: Shifter Transfer Failure C099C: Shift Motor M27s Failure to Turn
Symbol PC3 PC4 PC6 M27 PWB-A PWB-A PWB-H Name Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Paper Shift Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board Cabinet Transport Board
1136T030AA
T-97
* C0998, C0999
Step 1 Check Item Is C0999 being shown? Slide out the 3rd Drawer, block PC4 with a sheet of paper, and check PC4 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-3 2) Select the function "Port." 2 3) Is the data for P39-3 set to "L"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC4. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.
LLHHL10 L LHHL
1136T121AA
YES
Unblock PC4 and check PC4 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3 3) Is the data for P39-3 set to "H"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC4. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
LLHHL10 H LHLL
1136T122AA
YES
T-98
* C099A, C099b
Step 1 Check Item Is C099b being shown? Block PC3 and check PC3 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-8 2) Select the function "Port." 2 3) Is the data for P39-8 set to "L"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Result YES Action Perform step 3.
LLHHL10 H LHLL
1136T123AA
YES
Unblock PC3 and check PC2 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P39-8 2) Select the function "Port." 3 3) Is the data for P39-8 set to "H"? NO Check PWB-H and flat cable and replace PC3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
LLHHL10 H HHLH
1136T124AA
YES
* C099C
Step 1 Check Item Does M27 turn when the Drawer is slid in with a paper stack loaded in the Shift Tray? Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 (moving to right) on PF-102 PWB-A and GND change from DC0V to DC24V when the Drawer is slid in with a paper stack loaded in the Shift Tray? (M27) Does the voltage across PJ10-12 on PF-102 PWB-A and GND change in the range between DC0V and DC5V while M27 is turning? (PC6) Result YES Action Perform step 3. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Replace M27 or check PWB-H and flat cable. Check the pulse disk and PWB-H. Replace PC6. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. Check gears and for overload.
NO
YES NO
YES
T-99
2-18. C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure
Symbol PC1
PWB-A (EP2050)
Name Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor 3rd Drawer Set Sensor 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor 3rd Drawer Lock Solenoid EP2050 Master Board PF-102 Master Board Main Tray Paper Empty Board Cabinet Transport Board
1136C31TAA
T-100
*C0996 Step 1 Check Item Is SL41 energized after the Paper Descent Key has been pressed? Slide out the 3rd Drawer and then slide it in with no paper loaded in it. Then, check SL41 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P38-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P38-7 set to "1"? 2 First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary. NO Result YES Action Perform step 3.
LLHHL10 H HHHH
1136T125AA
4) Show the data for P38-7. Is SL41 operated when the data is changed from "1" to "0"? (Listen for the sound of operation.) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC7 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P37-6 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P37-6 set to "H"?
NO
Check wiring up to SL41 or replace SL41. Adjust the SL41 stroke or check the Drawer locking mechanism.
YES
Check PC7.
NO
6) Show the data for P37-6. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?
NO
Replace PC7 and Drawer Pushing Spring. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-101
*C0F79 Step 1 Check Item Is C0F79 being shown with the Main Tray in the raised position? Slide out the 3rd Drawer and make the following checks with no paper on PWB-E. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P36-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P36-1 set to "H"? Check PWB-E and flat cable. Check the sensor on PWB-E. Result YES Action Perform step 3.
NO
6) Show the data for P36-1. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?
NO
Check PWB-H and flat cable. Replace PWB-E. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-102
Step
Check Item Let a sheet of paper push up the actuator of PC20 and, in that condition, check PC20 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P35-8 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P35-8 set to "L"?
Result
Action
NO
4) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and make sure that no paper is loaded on the Tray. 5) Select "Port" again.
6) Show the data for P35-8. Has the data changed from "L" to "H"?
NO
Check the actuator. Replace PC20. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-103
Step
Check Item Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC1 with no paper on the Shift Tray. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Port: P35-3 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P35-3 set to "H"?
Result
Action
NO
6) Show the data for P35-3. Has the data changed from "H" to "L"?
NO
Check PWB-H and flat cable. Replace PC1. First replace PF-102 PWB-A, then replace EP2050 PWB-A if necessary.
YES
T-104
2-19. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates Home Position Detection Failure C0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit Home Position Detection Failure C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31s Failure to Turn C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at Abnormal Timing
Symbol PC8
PWB-A (EP2050)
Name Duplex Gate Home Position Sensor Front/Rear Edge Guide Plate Home Position Sensor Duplex Unit Drive Motor Gate Motor Front/Rear Edge Guide Drive Motor EP2050 Master Board PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D Master Board Duplex Unit Master Board
1136C32TAA
T-105
C0d00
Step Check Item Does M33 turn when the Power Switch is turned ON or Duplex Unit slid into position? 1 Result Action Replace M33, PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload.
NO
YES Check PC9 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Block PC9. (The Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates are at their home positions.) 2) Port: P43-5 3) Select the function "Port." 2 4) Is the data for P43-5 set to "L"? NO
Replace PC9. Replace PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order.
YES
T-106
C0d20
Step Check Item Does M32 turn when the Power Switch is turned ON or Duplex Unit slid into position? Result NO YES Check PC8 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.) 1) Block PC8. (The Trailing Gate Unit is at its home position.) 2) Port: P44-8 3) Select the function "Port." 2 4) Is the data for P44-8 set to "L"? NO Replace PC8. Replace PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Action Replace M32, PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. Check for possible overload.
YES
T-107
C0d50, C0d51
Step 1 Check Item Is C0d51 being shown? Check M31 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P42-1 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P42-1 set to "1"? Replace PWB-G, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D, or EP2050 PWB-A, in that order. NO Result YES Action Perform step 3.
1 01 LHHH
1136T144AA
4) Does M31 operate when the data for P42-1 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Listen for the sound of operation.) Check the input signal when M31 is stationary (the Duplex Unit Drive Motor Lock signal) as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.) 1) Port: P44-7 2) Select the function "Port." 3) Is the data for P44-7 set to "H"? 3
NO YES
NO
YES
T-108
Symbol S1 RY1 UN1 PWB-B PWB-A PWB-C PWB-D PU1 Main Relay
Control Panel MSC Board Master Board Power Supply Board Noise Filter Board DC Power Supply Unit
1136C22TAA
T-109
Symptom
Step 1
Check Item Is the source voltage being supplied to the circuit across PJ-1 and 3 of PU1? Is the voltage across PJ2-2 on PU1 and GND DC24V? Is the voltage across PJ5C-2 on PWB-C and GND 24V when S1 is OFF? Are the voltages across PJ5C-1 on PWB-C and GND, and across PJ5C-3 on PWB-C and GND, DC24V when S1 is ON? Is the voltage across PJ8C-4 on PWB-C and GND DC24V when S1 is ON? Is the voltage across PJ4-1 on PU1 and GND DC5V when S1 is ON? Does the voltage across PJ5AB-8 on PWB-A and GND instantaneously go from HIGH to LOW when S1 is turned ON? Are the voltages across PJ1C-3 on PWB-C and GND, and across PJ1C-5 on PWB-C and GND, DC24V when S1 is ON? Is the voltage across PJ4-2 on PU1 and GND DC5V? Are all PJs on PWB-B plugged securely into position? Is PJ1I plugged securely into PWB-I? Is PJ5A plugged securely into PWB-A?
Result NO
Action Check the main fuse and supply power. If they check okay, replace PWB-D. Check the fuse on PU1 and, if it checks okay, replace PU1. Replace PWB-C.
NO
NO Check S1. NO
Replace PWB-C. NO
Check RY1. NO
No control panel
Indicators light up, though RY1 is turned ON.
NO
NO NO YES
T-110
T-111
Step 1
Check Item
Result YES
Action
1) 2) 3)
NO
4) 5)
6)
NO
YES
1) 2) 3)
NO
4) 3 5)
6)
NO
YES
T-112